InteliLite

MRS16
Controller for single gen-set
applications

SW version 1.2.1
Table of contents 2
1 Document information 6
2 System overview 10
3 Applications overview 17
4 Installation and wiring 18
5 Controller setup 44
6 Communication 118
7 Technical data 145
8 Appendix 147

Copyright © 2016 ComAp a.s.

Written by Michal Slavata
Prague, Czech Republic
ComAp a.s., Kundratka 2359/17,
180 00 Praha 8, Czech Republic
Tel: +420 246 012 111
E-mail: [email protected], www.comap.cz Global Guide
Table of contents
1 Document information 6
1.1 Clarification of notation 6
1.2 About this Global Guide 6
1.3 Legal notice 6
1.4 General warnings 7
1.4.1 Remote control and programing 7
1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility 7
1.4.3 Dangerous voltage 7
1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints 7
1.5 Certifications and standards 8
1.6 Document history 8
1.7 Symbols in this manual 9

2 System overview 10
2.1 General description 10
2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 10
2.2 True RMS measurement 10
2.3 Configuration And Monitoring 10
2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools 11
2.3.2 Configuration parts 11
2.4 PC Tools 12
2.4.1 LiteEdit2015 12
2.4.2 WebSupervisor 12
2.4.3 WinScope 13
2.5 Plug-in Modules 13
2.5.1 CM-Ethernet 13
2.5.2 CM-4G-GPS 13
2.5.3 CM-GPRS 14
2.5.4 CM-RS232-485 14
2.5.5 EM-BIO8-EFCP 14
2.6 CAN modules 15
2.6.1 Inteli AIN8 15
2.6.2 Inteli IO8/8 15
2.6.3 IGL-RA15 16
2.6.4 I-LB+ 16

3 Applications overview 17

InteliLite Global Guide 2

 3.1 MRS - Manual Remote Start 17

4 Installation and wiring 18

4.1 Package content 18
4.2 Controller installation 19
4.2.1 Dimensions 19
4.2.2 Mounting 19
4.3 Terminal Diagram 21
4.4 Recommended wiring 22
4.4.1 General 23
4.4.2 Grounding 23
4.4.3 Power supply 23
4.4.4 Measurement wiring 25
4.4.5 Magnetic pick-up 30
4.4.6 Binary inputs 31
4.4.7 Binary Outputs 32
4.4.8 Emergency stop 33
4.4.9 Analog inputs 33
4.4.10 CAN bus and RS485 wiring 36
4.4.11 USB 39
4.4.12 Example of MRS Wiring 40
4.5 Plug-in module installation 41
4.6 Maintenance 42
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement 42

5 Controller setup 44
5.1 Default configuration 44
5.1.1 Binary inputs 44
5.1.2 Binary outputs 44
5.1.3 Analog inputs 44
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools connection 45
5.2.1 USB 45
5.2.2 RS232 46
5.2.3 Ethernet 47
5.3 Operator Guide 52
5.3.1 Front panel elements 52
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 54
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 65
5.3.4 Password 66
5.3.5 Information screen 70

InteliLite Global Guide 3

 5.3.6 Language selection 71
5.3.7 Display contrast adjustment 73
5.4 Functions 73
5.4.1 Start-stop sequence 74
5.4.2 Operating Modes 75
5.4.3 Engine start 76
5.4.4 Stabilization 81
5.4.5 Connecting to load 81
5.4.6 MRS operation 81
5.4.7 Engine cool down and stop 81
5.4.8 Alarm management 82
5.4.9 History log 88
5.4.10 Breaker control 89
5.4.11 Exercise timers 92
5.4.12 Rental Timers 99
5.4.13 Service timers 100
5.4.14 Analog switches 100
5.4.15 Flowchart 102
5.4.16 Additional running engine indications 103
5.4.17 Voltage phase sequence detection 103
5.4.18 Gen-set operation states 103
5.4.19 Sensor curves 105
5.4.20 PLC 107
5.4.21 Geo-fencing 113
5.4.22 Tier 4 Final 113
5.4.23 Alternate configuration 116

6 Communication 118
6.1 PC 118
6.1.1 Direct communication 118
6.1.2 Remote communication 120
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 131
6.2.1 SNMP 131
6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 133

7 Technical data 145

8 Appendix 147
8.1 Controller objects 148
8.1.1 Setpoints 149

InteliLite Global Guide 4

 8.1.2 Values 404
8.1.3 Logical binary inputs 448
8.1.4 Logical binary outputs 462
8.1.5 Logical analog inputs 514
8.1.6 PLC 546
8.2 Alarms 559
8.2.1 Alarms level 1 559
8.2.2 Alarms level 2 581
8.2.3 Fail sensor and other types 599
8.3 Modules 601
8.3.1 Plug-In modules 602
8.3.2 CAN modules 616

InteliLite Global Guide 5

1 Document information
1.1 Clarification of notation 6
1.2 About this Global Guide 6
1.3 Legal notice 6
1.4 General warnings 7
1.5 Certifications and standards 8
1.6 Document history 8
1.7 Symbols in this manual 9

6 back to Table of contents

1.1 Clarification of notation

Note: This type of paragraph calls readers attention to a notice or related theme.

IMPORTANT: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or unproper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.

Example: This type of paragraph contains information that is used to illustrate how a specific function
works.

1.2 About this Global Guide

This manual contains important instructions for InteliLite controllers family that shall be followed during
installation and maintenance of the controllers.
This manual provides general information how to install and operate InteliLite controllers.
This manual is dedicated for:
Operators of gen-sets
Gen-set control panel builders
For everybody who is concerned with installation, operation and maintenance of the gen-set

1.3 Legal notice

This End User's Guide /Manual as part of the Documentation is an inseparable part of ComAp’s Product and
may be used exclusively according to the conditions defined in the “USER or Distributor LICENSE
AGREEMENT CONDITIONS– COMAP CONTROL SYSTEMS SOFTWARE” (License Agreement) and in the
“ComAp a.s. Standard Terms for sale of Products and provision of Services” (Standard Terms)
ComAp’s License Agreement is governed by the Czech Authorship Act 121/2000 Col., by international treaties
and by other relevant legal documents regulating protection of the intellectual properties (TRIPS).
The End User and/or ComAp’s Distributor shall only be permitted to use this End User's Guide /Manual with
ComAp Control System Registered Products. The Documentation is not intended and applicable for any other
purpose.

InteliLite Global Guide 6

 ComAp reserves the right to update this End User's Guide /Manual at any time. ComAp does not assume any
responsibility for its use outside of the scope of the Standard Terms and the License Agreement.
Licensed End User is entitled to make only necessary number of copies of the End User's Guide /Manual. Any
translation of this End User's Guide /Manual without the prior written consent of ComAp is expressly prohibited!
Even if the prior written consent from ComAp is acquired, ComAp does not take any responsibility for the
content and quality of any such translation. ComAp will deem a translation equal to this End User's
Guide/Manual only if it agrees to verify such a translation. The terms and conditions of such verification must be
included in the written consent.
For more details relating to the Ownership, Extent of Permitted Reproductions Term of Use of the
Documentation and to the Confidentiality rules please review and comply with the ComAp’s END
USER or Distributor LICENSE AGREEMENT CONDITIONS– COMAP CONTROL SYSTEMS
SOFTWARE and STANDARD TERMS FOR SALE OF PRODUCTS AND PROVISION OF SERVICES
available on the www.comap.cz.
Used Open Source Software: mBed-TLS
https://www.mbed.com/en/development/software/mbed-tls/
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

1.4 General warnings

1.4.1 Remote control and programing
Controller can be remotely controlled. In the event that maintenance of gen-set has to be done, or controller has
to be programmed, check the following points to ensure that the engine cannot be started or any other parts of
the system cannot be effected.
To be sure:
Disconnect remote control
Disconnected binary outputs

1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

Be aware to use proper combination of SW and HW versions.

1.4.3 Dangerous voltage

In no case touch the terminals for voltage and current measurement!
Always connect grounding terminals!
In any case do not disconnect controller CT terminals!

1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints

All parameters are adjusted to their typical values. However the setpoints has to be checked and adjusted to
their real values before the first starting of the gen-set.
IMPORTANT: Wrong adjustment of setpoints can destroy the gen-set.

InteliLite Global Guide 7

 Note: The controller contains a large number of configurable setpoints, because of this it is impossible to
describe all of its functions. Some functions can be changed or have different behavior in different SW versions.
Always check the Global guide and New feature list for SW version which is used in controller. This manual
only describes the product and is not guaranteed to be set for your application.

IMPORTANT: Be aware that the binary outputs can change state during and after software
reprogramming (before the controller is used again ensure that the proper configuration and
setpoint settings are set in the controller).

The following instructions are for qualified personnel only. To avoid personal injury do not perform any action not
specified in related guides for product.

1.5 Certifications and standards

Certificates and standards
EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-4

EN 61010-1

EN 61000-2-1 (-20 °C/16 h for std, -40 °C/16 h for LT version)

EN 61000-2-2 (70 °C/16 h)

EN 61000-2-6 (2÷25 Hz / ±1,6 mm; 25÷100 Hz / 4,0 g)

EN 61000-2-27 (a=500 m/s2; T=6 ms)

EN 61000-2-30

EN 60529 (front panel IP65, back side IP20)

1.6 Document history

Revision number Related sw. version Date Author
4 1.2.1 5.12.2016 Michal Slavata
3 1.1.0 23.5.2016 Michal Slavata
2 1.1.0 6.3.2016 Michal Slavata
1 1.0.0 15.7.2016 Michal Slavata

InteliLite Global Guide 8

1.7 Symbols in this manual

Connector - Resistor
3 x Phases Grounding
male adjustable

Active Resistive
current Contact GSM sensor
sensor RPTC
GSM RS 232
Contactor
AirGate modem male

Controller RS 232
IG-AVRi
Alternating simplified female
current
Module IG-AVRi
Starter
Analog simplified TRANS
modem
Switch -
Current
Jumper manually
measuring
Battery operated

Current
Load Transformer
Binary measuring
output
USB type B
Diode Mains male
Breaker
contact
Ethernet USB type B
Mains female
Breaker male
contact
Voltage
Ethernet Mobile
measuring
female provider
Breaker
Passive Wifi / WAN /
Fuel
current LAN
solenoid
Breaker sensor
6 back to Document
information
Fuse Pick - up
Breaker

Fuse switch Relay coil

Capacitor
Relay coil of
Generator slow-
Coil
operating
Generator
Connector - schematic Resistor
female

InteliLite Global Guide 9

2 System overview
2.1 General description 10
2.2 True RMS measurement 10
2.3 Configuration And Monitoring 10
2.4 PC Tools 12
2.5 Plug-in Modules 13
2.6 CAN modules 15

6 back to Table of contents

2.1 General description

InteliLite Family controllers are comprehensive gen-set controllers for single generating sets operating in stand-
by or parallel modes. A modular construction allows upgrades to different levels of complexity in order to provide
the best solution for various customer applications. The controllers are equipped with a powerful graphic display
showing icons, symbols and bar graphs for intuitive operation, which, together with its high level of functionality,
sets new standards in Gen-set controls.

2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite

Easy-to-use operation and installation. The factory default configuration covers most applications
Various customizations are possible thanks to its configurability
Excellent remote communication capabilities
High level of support for EFI engines (most world producers)
High reliability

2.2 True RMS measurement

This controller measures AC values based on True RMS principle. This principle corresponds exactly to the
physical definition of alternating voltage effective values. Under normal circumstances the mains voltage
should have a pure sinusoidal waveform. However some nonlinear elements connected to the mains produce
harmonic waveforms with frequencies of multiplies of the basic mains frequency and this may result in
deformation of the voltage waveforms. The True RMS measurement gives accurate readings of effective values
not only for pure sinusoidal waveforms, but also for deformed waveforms.

2.3 Configuration And Monitoring

One of the key features of the controller is the system’s high level of adaptability to the needs of each individual
application and wide possibilities for monitoring. This can be achieved by configuring and using the powerful
PC/mobile tools.

InteliLite Global Guide 10

2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools
LiteEdit2015 - complete configuration and single gen-set monitoring
WebSupervisor - web-based system for monitoring and controlling
WebSupervisor mobile - supporting application for smart-phones
WinScope - special graphical monitoring software

Note: Use the LiteEdit2015 PC software to read, view and modify configuration from the controller or disk and
write the new configuration to the controller or disk.

The firmware of controller contains a large number of binary inputs and outputs needed for all necessary
functions available. However, not all functions are required at the same time on the same gen-set and also the
controller hardware does not have so many input and output terminals. One of the main tasks of the
configuration is mapping of “logical” firmware inputs and outputs to the “physical” hardware inputs and outputs.

2.3.2 Configuration parts

Mapping of logical binary inputs (functions) or assigning alarms to physical binary input terminals
Mapping of logical binary outputs (functions) to physical binary output terminals
Assigning sensor characteristics (curves) and alarms to analog inputs
Selection of peripheral modules, which are connected to the controller, and doing the same (as mentioned
above) for them
Selection of ECU type, if an ECU is connected
Changing the language of the controller interface

Image 2.1 Principle of binary inputs and outputs configuration

InteliLite Global Guide 11

 The controller is shipped with a default configuration, which should be suitable for most standard applications.
This default configuration can be changed only by using a PC with the LiteEdit2015 software. See LiteEdit2015
documentation for details.
Once the configuration is modified, it can be saved to a file for later usage with another controller or for backup
purposes. The file is called archive and has the file extension .aic. An archive contains a full image of the
controller at the time of saving (if the controller is online for the PC) except the firmware. Besides configuration it
also contains current adjustment of all setpoints, all measured values, a copy of the history log and a copy of the
alarm list.
The archive can be simply used for cloning controllers, i.e. preparing controllers with identical configuration and
settings.

2.4 PC Tools
2.4.1 LiteEdit2015
Configuration and monitoring tool for InteliLite controllers. See more in LiteEdit2015 Reference Guide.

This tool provides the following functions:

Direct or internet communication with the
controller
Offline or online controller configuration
Controller firmware upgrade
Reading/writing/adjustment of setpoints
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
Exporting data into a XLS file
Controller language translation

2.4.2 WebSupervisor
Web-based system for monitoring and controlling of controllers. See more at the WebSupervisor webpage.

This tool provides the following functions:

Site and fleet monitoring
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
On-line notification of alarms
Email notification
Also available as a smart-phone application

WebSupervisor available at: http://websupervisor.comap.cz/

Demo account:
Login: comaptest
Password: comaptest

InteliLite Global Guide 12

2.4.3 WinScope
Special graphical controller monitoring software used mainly for commissioning and gen-set troubleshooting.
See more in the WinScope Reference guide.

This tool provides the following functions:

Monitoring and archiving of ComAp controller’s
parameters and values
View of actual / historical trends in controller
On-line change of controllers’ parameters for
easy regulator setup

2.5 Plug-in Modules

2.5.1 CM-Ethernet
Internet/Ethernet module including web server.
10/100 Mbit ethernet interface in RJ45 socket
Web interface for monitoring and adjustment of
the controller
Direct IP and/or AirGate connection for remote
access from LiteEdit2015
MODBUS/TCP and SNMP protocols for
integration of the controller into building
management systems or other remote
monitoring purposes
Sending of active emails
Simply connection via AirGate

2.5.2 CM-4G-GPS
GSM/4G Internet module and GPS locator
Wireless integrated solution
Quick and easy installation
Support of WebSupervisor
Instant alarm SMS notification
System control over SMS
Quad Band GPRS/EDGE modem,
850/900/1800/1900 MHz
GPRS multi-slot class 10
TCP/IP communication over GPRS

InteliLite Global Guide 13

2.5.3 CM-GPRS
GSM/GPRS Internet module
Wireless integrated solution
Quick and easy installation
Support of WebSupervisor
Instant alarm SMS notification
System control over SMS
Quad Band GPRS/EDGE modem,
850/900/1800/1900 MHz
GPRS multi-slot class 10
TCP/IP communication over GPRS

2.5.4 CM-RS232-485
Communication module with two communication ports.
RS232 and RS485 interface
MODBUS, ECU link support
Serial connection to LiteEdit2015

2.5.5 EM-BIO8-EFCP
Hybrid current input and binary input/output extension module.
One additional AC current (CT) measuring for
Earth Fault Current protection (EFCP)
Wide range of measured current - one input for
1A and 1 input for 5A
Up to 8 additional configurable binary inputs or
outputs

InteliLite Global Guide 14

2.6 CAN modules
2.6.1 Inteli AIN8
The extension module Inteli AIN8 offers users more analog inputs and outputs for controllers. The unit offers the
user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 analog inputs.

Supported sensors:
Resistor 3-wire input
Common resistor: 0-250Ω, 0-2400Ω, 0-10kΩ
Temperature sensor: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100,
Ni1000
Current (active or passive sensors)
±20mA , 0-20mA, 4-20mA
Voltage
±1V, 0-2,4V, 0-5V, 0-10V
Lambda probes
Thermocouples are not supported (the
measuring loop was designed for lambda
probes, what caused non-support of
thermocouples)

2.6.2 Inteli IO8/8

The extension module Inteli IO8/8 offers users more binary inputs and outputs for controllers. The unit offers the
user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, and 2 analog outputs, or 16
binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs via switches inside the controller.

Configuration 8/8
8 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
8 Binary outputs (options: Low side switch (LSS)
or High side switch (HSS))
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10V),
current (0-20mA) and PWM (5V, adjustable
frequency 200Hz-2,4kHz))
Configuration 16/0
16 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
0 Binary outputs
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10V),
current (0-20mA) and PWM (5V, adjustable
frequency 200Hz-2,4kHz))

InteliLite Global Guide 15

2.6.3 IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator.

15 programmable LEDs with configurable colors

red-green-yellow
Customizable labels
Local horn output
Lamp test function
Maximal distance 200 m from the controller
UL certified

2.6.4 I-LB+
Local Bridge.
Communication bridge for sites with multiple
controllers for local or remote monitoring and
control
Direct (RS232,RS485), modem, Modbus or
USB connection to multiple controllers
Communication speed up to 57600 bps
(including Modbus mode)
Analog / GSM / ISDN / CDMA modem support

6 back to System overview

InteliLite Global Guide 16

3 Applications overview
3.1 MRS - Manual Remote Start 17

6 back to Table of contents

InteliLite controllers are designed for single applications.

3.1 MRS - Manual Remote Start

The typical scheme of Manual Remote Start application is shown below. The controller controls one breaker – a
generator breaker. Feedback from breaker isn’t necessary. InteliLite controllers can also work without breaker
feedback.

Image 3.1 MRS application overview

6 back to Applications overview

InteliLite Global Guide 17

4 Installation and wiring
4.1 Package content 18
4.2 Controller installation 19
4.3 Terminal Diagram 21
4.4 Recommended wiring 22
4.5 Plug-in module installation 41
4.6 Maintenance 42

6 back to Table of contents

4.1 Package content

The package contains:
Controller
Mounting holders
Terminal blocks

Note: The package does not contain a communication or extension modules. The required modules should be
ordered separately.

InteliLite Global Guide 18

4.2 Controller installation
4.2.1 Dimensions

① Plug-in module
Note: Dimension x depends on plug-in module

Note: Dimensions are in millimeters.

Note: Cutout is in millimeters.

4.2.2 Mounting
The controller is to be mounted onto the switchboard door. Requested cutout size is 187 x 132 mm. Use the
screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller into the door as described on pictures below.
Recommended torque for holders is 0,15 Nm.

Panel door mounting Overview of parameter x

InteliLite Global Guide 19

 Plug-in module Parameter x [mm]
CM-RS232-485 105 @ RS232 / 62 @ RS485
CM-Ethernet 95
USB 85
Depends on connector of
CM-GPRS
antenna
EM-BIO8 62
Depends on connector of
CM-4G-GPS
antenna

Note: The controller is to be mounted into panel doors as a standalone unit using provided metal holders. The
requested cut-out size is 187x132 mm. Use the screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller
into the door.

Note: Enclosure Type rating with mounting instruction - For use on a Flat surface of a type 1 enclosure.

InteliLite Global Guide 20

4.3 Terminal Diagram
① GENERATOR CURRENT ② GENERATOR VOLTAGE ③ BINARY INPUTS
MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT
T28 COM T35 N T43 BIN1
T29 L1 T36 L1 T44 BIN2
T30 L2 T37 L2 T45 BIN3
T31 L3 T38 L3 T46 BIN4
T47 BIN5
T48 BIN6
T49 BIN7

Image 4.1 Terminal diagram for InteliLite MRS16

④ CAN1 ⑤ ANALOG INPUTS ⑥ BINARY OUTPUTS ⑦ POWER SUPPLY,

D+
T25 L T15 RPM GND T04 BOUT1 T01 BATT -
T26 COM T16 RPM IN T05 BOUT2 T02 D+
T27 H T17 A COM T06 BOUT3 T03 BATT +
T18 A01 T07 BOUT4
T19 A02 T08 BOUT5
T20 A03 T09 BOUT6
T21 A04 T10 BOUT7

InteliLite Global Guide 21

4.4 Recommended wiring

Current inputs 28 - 31 Current measurement wiring (page 25)

Voltage inputs 35 - 38 Voltage measurement MRS wiring (page 27)

Binary inputs 43 - 49 Binary inputs (page 31)

CAN bus and RS485 H, COM, L CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 36)

Analog inputs 15 - 21 Analog inputs (page 33)

Binary outputs 04 - 10 Binary Outputs (page 32)

Power supply "+", D, "-" Power supply (page 23)

USB USB (page 39)

Note: Wiring terminal markings to included tightening torque: 0,5 N-m (4,5 lb-in)., and wire size: 2 mm2 (12-
26AWG).

InteliLite Global Guide 22

4.4.1 General
To ensure proper function:
Use grounding terminals.
Wiring for binary inputs and analog inputs must not be run with power cables.
Analog and binary inputs should use shielded cables, especially when the length is more than 3 m.

Tightening torque, allowable wire size and type, for the Field-Wiring Terminals:
For Mains(Bus) Voltage, Generator Voltage and Current terminals

Specified tightening torque is 0,56 Nm (5,0 In-lb)

use only diameter 2,0 - 0,5 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 90°C minimum.

For other controller field wiring terminals

Specified tightening torque 0,79 nm (7,0 In-lb)

Use only diameter 2,0 - 0,5 mm (12 - 26 AWWG) conductor,

rated for 75°C minimum.

use copper conductors only

4.4.2 Grounding
The shortest possible piece of wire should be used for controller grounding. Use cable min 2,5 mm2.
The negative " - " battery terminal must be properly grounded.
Switchboard and engine must be grounded at common point. Use as short cable as possible to the grounding
point.

4.4.3 Power supply

To ensure proper function:
Use power supply cable min. 1,5 mm2
Maximum continuous DC power supply voltage is 36 VDC. The controller’s power supply terminals are
protected against large pulse power disturbances. When there is a potential risk of the controller being subjected
to conditions outside its capabilities, an outside protection device should be used.

InteliLite Global Guide 23

 It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between generator current COM terminal and battery “ - ”
terminal is maximally ± 2 V. Therefore is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals together.
Note: The controller should be grounded properly in order to protect against lighting strikes. The maximum
allowable current through the controller’s negative terminal is 4 A (this is dependent on binary output load).

For the connections with 12 VDC power supply, the controller includes internal capacitors that allow the
controller to continue operation during cranking if the battery voltage dip occurs. If the voltage before dip is 10 V,
after 100 ms the voltage recovers to 7 V, the controller continues operating. During this voltage dip the controller
screen backlight can turn off and on but the controller keeps operating. It is possible to further support the
controller by connecting the external capacitor and separating diode or I-LBA module:

The capacitor size depends on required time. It shall be approximately thousands of μF. The capacitor size
should be 5 000 μF to withstand 150 ms voltage dip under following conditions:
Voltage before dip is 12 V, after 150 ms the voltage recovers to min. allowed voltage, i.e. 8 V.
Or by connecting special I-LBA Low Battery Adapter module:

The I-LBA module ensures min. 350 ms voltage dip under following conditions:
RS232 and other plug-in module is connected.
Voltage before dip is 12 V and after 350 ms the voltage recovers to min. allowed voltage 5 V.
The I-LBA enables controller operation from 5 VDC (for 10 to 30 sec).
The wiring resistance from battery should be up to 0,1 Ohm for I-LBA proper function.

Note: I-LBA may not eliminate voltage drop when used with low temperature (-40 °C) version of controller and
display heating element is on (below 5 °C). Current drain of heating element exhausts LBA capacitors very fast.

InteliLite Global Guide 24

 IMPORTANT: When the controller is power up only by USB and the USB is disconnected then the
actual statistics is lost.

Note: Suitable conductor protection shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 240.

Note: Low voltage circuits (35 volts or less) shall be supplied from the engine starting battery or an isolated
secondary circuit.

Power supply fusing

A two-amp fuse should be connected in-line with the battery positive terminal to the controller and modules.
These items should never be connected directly to the starting battery. Fuse value and type depends on number
of connected devices and wire length. Recommended fuse (not fast) type - T2A. Not fast due to internal
capacitors charging during power up.

IMPORTANT: 2 A fuse is calculated without BOUT consumption nor extension modules. Real value
of fuse depends on consumption of binary outputs and modules.

Example: Maximal consumption of binary outputs can be 22 A

2 x 10 A on high current outputs (for 10 seconds)
2 A on all others binary outputs

4.4.4 Measurement wiring

Use 1.5 mm2 cables for voltage connection and 2.5 mm2 for current transformers connection. Adjust Connection
type (page 157), Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159), Nominal Current (page
156), PT Ratio (page 159) and CT Ratio (page 157) by appropriate setpoints in the Basic Settings group.
IMPORTANT: Risk of personal injury due to electric shock when manipulating voltage terminals
under voltage. Be sure the terminals are not under voltage before touching them.
Do not open the secondary circuit of current transformers when the primary circuit is closed. Open
the primary circuit first.

Current measurement wiring

The number of CT’s is automatically selected based on selected value of setpoint Connection type (page 157)
[3Ph4Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph].
Generator currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is bellow <1% of CT range.
To ensure proper function:

InteliLite Global Guide 25

 Use cables of 2,5 mm2
Use transformers to 5 A
Connect CT according to following drawings:

3 phase application:

Image 4.2 3 phase application

It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between generator current COM terminal and battery “-”
terminal is maximally ± 2V. Therefore is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals together.

Split phase application:

Image 4.3 Split phase application

IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where is
normally connected the third phase.

InteliLite Global Guide 26

 Mono phase application:
Connect CT according to following drawings. Terminals phase 2 and phase 3 are opened.

Image 4.4 Mono phase application

Voltage measurement MRS wiring

There are 4 voltage measurement Connection Type (setpoint Connection type (page 157) [3Ph4Wire /3Ph3Wire
/ Split Ph / Mono Ph]) options, every type matches to corresponding generator connection type.
Note: For fusing of voltage measurement input use T1A or T2A fuse.

The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on Connection type (page 157) setting:
3Ph 4W – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
3Ph 3W – Ph-Ph voltage
Split Ph – Ph-N voltage
Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage

InteliLite Global Guide 27

 ConnectionType: 3 Phase 4 Wires

Image 4.5 3 phase application with neutral

ConnectionType: 3 Phase 3 Wires

Image 4.6 3 phase application without neutral

InteliLite Global Guide 28

 ConnectionType: Split Phase

Image 4.7 Split phase application

IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where is
normaly connected the third phase.

ConnectionType: Mono Phase

Image 4.8 Mono phase application

InteliLite Global Guide 29

4.4.5 Magnetic pick-up
A magnetic speed sensor (pickup) is the most common method of engine speed measurement. To use this
method, mount the pickup opposite to the engine flywheel, connect the cable to the controller as shown on the
picture below and adjust the setpoint Gear Teeth (page 160) according to the number of teeth on the flywheel.
For the details about the pick-up input parameters see Technical data on page 145
IMPORTANT: To ensure proper function use a shielded cable.

Be aware of interference signal from Speed governor when one speed pick-up is used
If engine will not start:
Check ground connection from pick-up to controllers, eventually disconnect ground connection to one of
them
Use galvanically separate RPM input using separation transformer RPM-ISO (1:1)

Note: In some cases the controller will measure a RPM value even though the gen-set is not running: RPM is
measured from the generator voltage (Gear Teeth = 0). Controller is measuring some voltage value on input
terminals due to open fusing. If RPM > 0 the controller will be put into a Not ready state and the engine will not
be allowed to start.

InteliLite Global Guide 30

4.4.6 Binary inputs
Use minimally 1 mm2 cables for wiring of Binary inputs.

Note: The name and function or alarm type for each binary input have to be assigned during the configuration.

InteliLite Global Guide 31

4.4.7 Binary Outputs
Use min. 1 mm2 cables for wiring of binary outputs. Use external relays as indicated on the schematic below for
all outputs except those where low-current loads are connected (signalization etc...).
IMPORTANT: Use suppression diodes on all relays and other inductive loads!

Note: Every single low current binary output can provide up to 0,5 A of steady current.

Note: Binary output 1 (terminal 4) and binary output 2 (terminal 5) are high current outputs (10A for 10s, 5A for
long term.).

IMPORTANT: When operating temperature is higher than 60 °C it is strongly recommended to limit

output current of high current binary outputs (terminal 4 and terminal 5) to 4 A (each).

InteliLite Global Guide 32

4.4.8 Emergency stop
The Emergency Stop function can be made in two ways:
Connecting a normally closed “mushroom-type” button to the binary input . This is a purely software solution.
A hard-wired solution, where the button also disconnects the power supply from the controller outputs.

Image 4.9 Hard-wired emergency stop

IMPORTANT: Suppression diodes are not indicated, but required.

4.4.9 Analog inputs

The analog inputs are designed for resistive automotive type sensors like VDO or DATCON. The sensors are
connected either by one wire (the second pole is the sensor body) or by two wires.
In the case of grounded sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the engine body as near to the sensors as
possible.
In the case of isolated sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the negative power supply terminal of the
controller as well as one pole of each sensor.

InteliLite Global Guide 33

 Analog inputs are typically used for: Oil Pressure, Coolant Temperature and Fuel Level. All of these parameters
are connected with relevant protections.

Image 4.10 Grounded sensors Image 4.11 Isolated sensors

Note: The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.

Analog inputs with voltage & current sensors

On each analog input, there is a possibility to connect voltage or current output sensor instead of
resistive one. Recommended wiring connection for these measurements and recommended curves are bellow.

Voltage sensors

Sensor’s output
R1 (Ω) R2 (Ω)
range (V)
0 - 10 390 100
0 - 30 1500 100
0 - 70 3300 100

InteliLite Global Guide 34

 Image 4.12 Wiring of analog input with voltage sensor

0 - 10 V
V 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ω 81 145 219 306 409 539 685 887 1125 1458 1933

0 - 30 V
V 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Ω 95 134 177 223 274 330 395 465
V 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Ω 543 633 735 853 993 1154 1350 1589

0 - 70 V
V 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Ω 99 117 137 155 175 196 219 242 266 291 318 346
V 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46
Ω 375 406 439 473 510 549 589 633 679 729 781 838
V 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70
Ω 873 963 1033 1110 1193 1283 1383 1492 1612 1748 1896 2065

Note: This is a conversion of voltage from voltage sensor to appropriate resistance value. Use resistance
values in LiteEdit2015 to create your specific curve. These values should be used in "Ohm" column.

Current sensors

Sensor’s output
R (Ω)
range (mA)
0-20 100

InteliLite Global Guide 35

 Image 4.13 Wiring of analog input with current sensor

0 - 22 mA
mA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Ω 100 133 167 202 241 283 328 375 431 489 553 625
mA 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Ω 707 793 894 1007 1136 1287 1460 1666 1914 2222 2596

Note: This is a conversion of current from current sensor to appropriate resistance value. Use resistance
values in LiteEdit2015 to create your specific curve. These values should be used in "Ohm" column.

4.4.10 CAN bus and RS485 wiring

CAN bus wiring
The wiring of the CAN bus communication should be provided in such a way that the following rules are
observed:
The maximum length of the CAN bus depends on the communication speed. For a speed of 250 kbps, which
is used on the CAN1 bus (extension modules, ECU), the maximum length is 200 m.
The bus must be wired in linear form with termination resistors at both ends. No nodes are allowed except on
the controller terminals.
Shielded cable1 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (BATT -).
External units can be connected on the CAN bus line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.

1Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA

Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

InteliLite Global Guide 36

 The CAN bus has to be terminated by 120 Ohm resistors at both ends use a cable with following
parameters:

Cable type Shielded twisted pair

Impedance 120 Ω
Propagation velocity ≥ 75% (delay ≤ 4,4 ns/m)
Wire crosscut ≥ 0,25 mm2
Attenuation (@1MHz) ≤ 2dB/100 m

Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.

Image 4.14 CAN bus topology

Note: A termination resistor at the CAN is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close the jumper
near the appropriate CAN terminal.

For shorter distances (connection within one building)

Image 4.15 CAN bus wiring for shorter distances

InteliLite Global Guide 37

 For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)

Image 4.16 CAN bus wiring for longer distances

① Recommended PT5-HF-12DC-ST1

RS485 wiring
The wiring of the RS485 communication should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
Standard maximum link length is 1000 m.
Shielded cable2 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (BATT -).
External units can be connected on the RS485 line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.
The line has to be terminated by 120 Ohm resistors at both ends.
For shorter distances (connection within one building)

Image 4.17 RS485 wiring for shorter distances

1Protections recommended: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-12DC-ST with PT2x2-

BE (base element) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-012/2 R DJ

2Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA

Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

InteliLite Global Guide 38

 For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)

Image 4.18 RS485 wiring for longer distances

① Recommended PT5HF-5DC-ST1
Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.

4.4.11 USB
This is required for computer connection. Use the shielded USB A-B cable.

Image 4.19 USB connection

Controller can by also power by USB (only for service purpose like a uploading firmware, change of
configuration, etc.).
IMPORTANT: Power supply by USB is only for service purpose. Binary inputs and outputs are in
logical 0. Also plug-in modules are not working.

1Recommended protections: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-5DC-ST with PT2x2-

BE (base element)(or MT-RS485-TTL) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-006/2 R DJ

InteliLite Global Guide 39

4.4.12 Example of MRS Wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 40

4.5 Plug-in module installation
Remove the back cover. To do this, press four holders which are located in corners.

After removing back cover insert the plug-in module. Plug-in module has to be inserted under holders. Start with
holders market by symbol 1. On the controller are also narrows for better navigation. After inserting plug-in
module under holders 1 press it down to holders market by symbol 2 which lock the module.

Insert the plug-in module under holders marked by symbol 1. Then insert the plug-in module under holders
marked by symbol 2.

InteliLite Global Guide 41

 After locking the plug-in module into holders, place back the back cover (small cover for connectors has to be
removed from back cover). Finally insert the small cover for connectors. Small covers are unique for each plug-
in module.

4.6 Maintenance
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement
The internal backup battery lifetime is approx. 6 years. If replacement of backup batter is needed, follow these
instructions:
Connect the controller to a PC and save an archive for backup purposes (not necessary but recommended).
Disconnect all terminals from the controller and remove the controller from the switchboard.
Remove the back cover and all plug-in modules.
Release the rear cover using a flat screwdriver or another suitable tool.

The battery is located in a holder on the circuit board. Remove the old battery with a small sharp screwdriver
and push with a finger the new battery into the holder.

InteliLite Global Guide 42

 Put the rear cover back. Use slight pressure to lock the snaps into the housing. Pay attention that the cover
is in correct position and not upside down!
Put back the plugin modules and back cover.
Power the controller on, adjust date and time and check all setpoints.

6 back to Installation and wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 43

5 Controller setup
5.1 Default configuration 44
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools connection 45
5.3 Operator Guide 52
5.4 Functions 73

6 back to Table of contents

5.1 Default configuration

5.1.1 Binary inputs
Number Description Configured function
BIN1 Remote start/stop command REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 460)
BIN2 Access lock keyswitch ACCESS LOCK (PAGE 450)
BIN3 Emergency stop button EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 453)
BIN4 Switch controller to OFF mode REMOTE OFF (PAGE 460)
BIN5 Suppression of alarms SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 461)
BIN6 Control lock keyswitch REMOTE CTRL  LOCK (PAGE 459)
BIN7 Free slot NOT USED (PAGE 458)

5.1.2 Binary outputs

Number Description Function
BOUT1 Starter motor control STARTER (PAGE 510)
BOUT2 Fuel solenoid valve FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493)
BOUT3 Indication of breaker state GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 495)
BOUT4 Activation of any devices before start PRESTART (PAGE 506)
BOUT5 Gen-set can be connected to load READY TO LOAD (PAGE 508)
BOUT6 Indication of unconfirmed alarm ALARM (PAGE 476)
BOUT7 Free slot NOT USED (PAGE 505)

5.1.3 Analog inputs

Number Configured sensor Function
AIN1 VDO 10 Bar OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 546)
AIN2 VDO40-120°C COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543)
AIN3 VDOLevel % FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 544)
AIN4 None NOT USED (PAGE 545)

InteliLite Global Guide 44

5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools
connection
5.2.1 USB 45
5.2.2 RS232 46
5.2.3 Ethernet 47

6 back to Controller setup

This chapter contains brief introduction into the specifics of firmware and archive upload and connection of
various PC tools to the controller. If you require detailed information on each PC tool please use the included
Help in those PC tools or download their Reference Guides.

5.2.1 USB
You may connect to the controller using the USB port. In this case standard USB A to B cable should be used.

Connection using LiteEdit2015

Image 5.1 First screen of LiteEdit2015 - select connect to controller

Image 5.2 Second screen of LiteEdit - select detected controllers

InteliLite Global Guide 45

 Connection using WinScope

Image 5.3 WinScope screen - select direct connection

5.2.2 RS232
It is possible to connect to the controller using RS232 direct connection (serial port or USB to RS232 converter
may be used). The following settings need to be checked in the controller:
COM1 Mode (page 300) = Direct
Controller Address (page 161) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool

Connection using LiteEdit2015

Image 5.4 First screen of LiteEdit2015 - select connect to controller

InteliLite Global Guide 46

 Image 5.5 Second screen of LiteEdit2015 - select Serial link

Connection using WinScope

Image 5.6 WinScope screen - select direct connection

5.2.3 Ethernet
It is possible to connect to the controller using ethernet port either directly or using ComAp's AirGate service.

Direct connection
When you use direct connection the controller needs to be reachable directly from the PC you use (i.e. one LAN
or WAN without any firewalls and other points that may not allow the connection). The following settings need to
be checked in the controller:

InteliLite Global Guide 47

 Controller Address (page 161) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool
IP Address Mode (page 332) can be set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service is available. Otherwise
it needs to be set to FIXED
IP Address (page 332) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Subnet Mask (page 333) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested
Gateway IP (page 333) can be set here when it is used
ComAp TCP Port (page 338) number is 23. Make sure that this port is open for communication in your network

Connection using LiteEdit2015

Image 5.7 First screen of LiteEdit2015 - select connect to controller

InteliLite Global Guide 48

 Image 5.8 Second screen of LiteEdit - select Internet/Ethernet

Connection using WinScope

Image 5.9 WinScope screen

AirGate connection
You can use ComAp's AirGate service that allows you to connect to any controller via internet no matter what
are the restrictions of the local network (if the controller can connect to the internet AirGate service will work).
The following setpoints have to be adjusted:

InteliLite Global Guide 49

 Controller Address (page 161) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool
IP Address Mode (page 332) can be set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service is available. Otherwise
it needs to be set to FIXED
IP Address (page 332) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Subnet Mask (page 333) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested
Gateway IP (page 333) can be set here when it is used
AirGate Connection (page 337) has to be set to Enabled
AirGate Address (page 337) currently there is one AirGate server running at URL airgate.comap.cz (enter this
URL into the setpoint)

Connection using LiteEdit2015

Image 5.10 First screen of LiteEdit2015 - select connect to controller

InteliLite Global Guide 50

 Image 5.11 Second screen of LiteEdit - select AirGate

Connection using WinScope

WinScope doesn't support connection via AirGate.

InteliLite Global Guide 51

5.3 Operator Guide
5.3.1 Front panel elements 52
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 54
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 65
5.3.4 Password 66
5.3.5 Information screen 70
5.3.6 Language selection 71
5.3.7 Display contrast adjustment 73

5.3.1 Front panel elements

Image 5.12 Operator interface of MRS16

Control buttons
Position Picture Description
LEFT button. Use this button to move left or to change the mode. The button can
change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of currently selected
mode is displayed.
Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced by
one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – “Operating modes” chapter.
RIGHT button. Use this button to move right or to change the mode. The button can
change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of currently selected
mode is displayed.

InteliLite Global Guide 52

 Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced by
one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – “Operating modes” chapter.

HORN RESET button. Use this button to deactivate the horn output without
acknowledging the alarms.

FAULT RESET button. Use this button to acknowledge alarms and deactivate the
horn output. Inactive alarms will disappear immediately and status of active alarms
will be changed to "confirmed" so they will disappear as soon as their reasons
dismiss.

UP button. Use this button to move up or increase value.

PAGE button. Use this button to switch over display pages.

DOWN button. Use this button to move down or decrease value.

ENTER button. Use this button to finish editing a setpoint or moving right in the
history page.

START button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the start
sequence of the engine.

STOP button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the stop
sequence of the gen-set. Repeated pressing of button will cancel current phase of
stop sequence (like cooling) and next phase will continue.

GCB button. Works in MAN and TEST modes only. Press this button to open or
close the GCB.

Indicators and others

Position Description
GENERATOR status indicator. There are two states - Gen-set OK (indicator is green) and Gen-
set failure (indicator is red). Green LED is on if the generator voltage is present and within limits.
Red LED starts flashing when gen-set failure occurs. After FAULT RESET button is pressed,
goes to steady light (if an alarm is still active) or is off (if no alarm is active).
GCB ON. Green LEDs are on if GCB is closed and Gen-set is healthy. If Gen-set is not healthy
and GCB is closed than middle LED is on. It is driven by GCB CLOSE/OPEN output or by GCB
feedback signal.
LOAD. Green LED is ON if load is supplied by generator. It means, that Gen-set is OK and
circuit breaker is closed.

Graphic B/W display, 132x64 pixels.

InteliLite Global Guide 53

5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure
Main Screen

Symbols
Padlock - active when LBI ACCESS LOCK is active
R - active when there is active remote connection to controller
Exclamation mark - active when there is any alarm in alarmlist

Measurement Screens

InteliLite Global Guide 54

InteliLite Global Guide 55
InteliLite Global Guide 56
InteliLite Global Guide 57
InteliLite Global Guide 58
InteliLite Global Guide 59
 Setpoint Screens

InteliLite Global Guide 60

 History Log

InteliLite Global Guide 61

InteliLite Global Guide 62
InteliLite Global Guide 63
InteliLite Global Guide 64
5.3.3 Browsing alarms

InteliLite Global Guide 65

5.3.4 Password
Enter password

InteliLite Global Guide 66

 Change password

InteliLite Global Guide 67

 Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required level
of password.

InteliLite Global Guide 68

 Log out from controller

InteliLite Global Guide 69

 Note: Enter invalid password to log out from controller.

5.3.5 Information screen

InteliLite Global Guide 70

5.3.6 Language selection

InteliLite Global Guide 71

InteliLite Global Guide 72
5.3.7 Display contrast adjustment

+ +

6 back to Controller setup

5.4 Functions
5.4.1 Start-stop sequence 74
5.4.2 Operating Modes 75
5.4.3 Engine start 76
5.4.4 Stabilization 81
5.4.5 Connecting to load 81
5.4.6 MRS operation 81
5.4.7 Engine cool down and stop 81
5.4.8 Alarm management 82
5.4.9 History log 88
5.4.10 Breaker control 89
5.4.11 Exercise timers 92
5.4.12 Rental Timers 99
5.4.13 Service timers 100
5.4.14 Analog switches 100
5.4.15 Flowchart 102
5.4.16 Additional running engine indications 103
5.4.17 Voltage phase sequence detection 103
5.4.18 Gen-set operation states 103
5.4.19 Sensor curves 105
5.4.20 PLC 107
5.4.21 Geo-fencing 113

InteliLite Global Guide 73

5.4.22 Tier 4 Final 113
5.4.23 Alternate configuration 116

6 back to Controller setup

5.4.1 Start-stop sequence

State Condition of the transition Action Next state
Ready Start request PRESTART (PAGE 506) on Prestart Prestart
Time (page 166) counter started
RPM > 2 or Oil pressure > Starting Stop (Stop
Oil Pressure (page 167) or Generator fail)
voltage > 10V or D+ voltage is
higher than 80%
OFF Mode selected or Shutdown Not Ready
alarm active
Not Ready RPM < 2, Oil pressure not Ready
detected, Generator voltage < 10V,
D+ not Active no shutdown alarm
active, other than OFF Mode
selected
Prestart Prestart time elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) on, Cranking
STARTER (PAGE 510) on, Maximum
Cranking Time (page 165) counter
started
Cranking RPM > Starting RPM STARTER (PAGE 510) off, PRESTART Starting
(PAGE 506) off
D+ input activated or oil pressure STARTER (PAGE 510) off, PRESTART Cranking
detected or Generator voltage > (PAGE 506) off
25% Nominal voltage
Maximum Cranking Time (page STARTER (PAGE 510) off, FUEL Crank
165), 1st attempt SOLENOID (PAGE 493) off, STOP pause
SOLENOID (PAGE 511) on, Cranking
Fail Pause (page 165) timer started
Maximum Cranking Time (page 165) STARTER (PAGE 510) off, PRESTART Shutdown
elapsed, last attempt (PAGE 506) off (Start fail)
Crank pause Cranking Fail Pause (page 165) STARTER (PAGE 510) on, FUEL Cranking
elapsed SOLENOID (PAGE 493) on, STOP
SOLENOID (PAGE 511) off, Maximum
Cranking Time (page 165) counter
started
Starting Idle Time (page 169) elapsed Minimal Stabilization Time (page 171) Running
and Maximal Stabilization Time (page
172) counter started
any shutdown condition FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) off, Shutdown

InteliLite Global Guide 74

 STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 511) on
all cranking attempts elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) off, Shutdown
STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 511) on (Start fail)
Running Stop request READY TO LOAD (PAGE 508) Cooling
off,Cooling Time (page 174) counter
started
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown READY TO LOAD (PAGE 508) off, Shutdown
condition FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) off
GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 495) Loaded
closed
Loaded GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 495) Running
opened
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) off, Shutdown
condition STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 511) on,
READY TO LOAD (PAGE 508) off,
Cooling Cooling Time (page 174) elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) off, Stop
STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 511) on
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) off, Shutdown
condition STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 511) on
Start request READY TO LOAD (PAGE 508) on Running
Stop RPM = 0, Oil pressure not Ready
detected, Generator vooltage <
10V, D+ not active
If at least one of engine running Stop (Stop
indication is detected when Stop fail)
Time (page 174) elapsed.

Note: If all generator parameters are OK and Minimal Stabilization Time (page 171) elapsed, indicates that GCB
is possible to close. In AUTO Mode GCB is closed in this moment automatically.

Note: The start-up sequence can be interrupted in any time by stop request

5.4.2 Operating Modes

Selecting the operating mode is done through Left and Right buttons on the front panel or by changing the
Controller mode (page 161) setpoint (from the front panel or remotely).
Note: If this setpoint is configured as password-protected, the correct password must be entered prior to
attempting to change the mode.

Note: The mode cannot be changed if Access Lock input is active.

The following binary inputs can be used to force one respective operating mode independent of the mode
setpoint selection:
Remote OFF (page 460)
Remote MAN (page 460)

InteliLite Global Guide 75

 Remote AUTO (page 459)
If the respective input is active the controller will change the mode to the respective position according to the
active input. If multiple inputs are active, the mode will be changed according to priorities of the inputs. The
priorities match the order in the list above. If all inputs are deactivated, the mode will return to the original
position given by the setpoint.

OFF
No start of the gen-set is possible. If the gen-set is running, the GCB will be opened and the engine will be
immediately stopped without unloading and cooling. After that the controller will stay in Not ready status and
cannot be started any way.

MAN
The engine can be started and stopped manually using the Start and Stop buttons (or external buttons
wired to the appropriate binary inputs) in MAN mode. When the engine is running, GCB can be closed.

AUTO
The controller does not respond to buttons Start , Stop and GCB ON/OFF .Engine start/stop request
is given by binary input Remote Start/Stop (page 460).

5.4.3 Engine start

Diesel engine
The setpoint Fuel Solenoid (page 164) has to be switched to the Diesel position.
After the command for start is issued (pressing Start button in MAN mode, auto start condition is fulfilled in
AUTO mode or controller is switched to TEST mode), outputs PRESTART (PAGE 506) and GLOW PLUGS
(PAGE 500) are energized for time period given by the setpoints Prestart Time (page 166) and Glow Plugs Time
(page 168).
After Prestart Time (page 166) and Glow Plugs Time (page 168), the output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) is
energized and after Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 169) the starter of motor is activated by energizing the output
STARTER (PAGE 510).
When one or more of following conditions are met, the starter output is de-energized:
The engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM (page 166), or
One of Additional running engine indications (page 103) signals becomes active.
The controller remains in the Starting phase until the engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM (page
166), after that it is considered as started and the Idle period will follow.
The maximum duration that the output STARTER (PAGE 510) is energized is determined by the setpoint
Maximum Cranking Time (page 165). If the engine does not start within this period, the output STARTER
(PAGE 510) is de-energized and a pause with length determined by Cranking Fail Pause (page 165) will follow.
PRESTART (PAGE 506) and GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 500) outputs are active during the pause. After the pause
has elapsed, the next start attempt is executed. The number of start attempts is given by the setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 165).
Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 503) remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle Time (page 169).

InteliLite Global Guide 76

 After the idle period has finished, the output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 503) is activated and the start-up
sequence is finished. The Stabilization (page 81) phase follows.

InteliLite Global Guide 77

 Image 5.13 Flowchart of start of diesel engine

InteliLite Global Guide 78

 GAS engine
The setpoint Fuel Solenoid (page 164) has to be switched to the Gas position.
After the command for start is issued (pressing Start button in MAN mode, auto start condition is fulfilled in
AUTO mode or controller is switched to TEST mode), outputs PRESTART (PAGE 506) and GLOW PLUGS
(PAGE 500) are energized for time period given by the setpoints Prestart Time (page 166) and Glow Plugs Time
(page 168).
After Prestart Time (page 166) and Glow Plugs Time (page 168), the starter of engine is activated by
energizing the output STARTER (PAGE 510).
When the engine speed exceeds 30RPM, the outputs FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) and IGNITION (PAGE 503)
are energized.
When the engine speed exceeds value of Starting RPM (page 166), the starter of engine is de-energized, the
engine is considered as started and the Idle period will follow.
IMPORTANT: Additional running engine indications (page 103) signals are not evaluated during the
start of a gas engine. The Pickup must be used in any case!

The maximum duration that the output STARTER (PAGE 510) is energized is determined by the setpoint
Maximum Cranking Time (page 165). If the engine does not start within this period, outputs STARTER (PAGE
510) and FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) are de-energized and a pause with length determined by Cranking Fail
Pause (page 165) will follow. PRESTART (PAGE 506), GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 500) and IGNITION (PAGE 503)
outputs are active during the pause. After the pause has elapsed, the next start attempt is executed. The
number of start attempts is given by the setpoint Cranking Attempts (page 165).
Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 503) remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle Time (page 169).
After the idle period has finished, the output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 503) is activated and the start-up
sequence is finished. The Stabilization (page 81) phase follows.

InteliLite Global Guide 79

 Image 5.14 Flowchart of start of gas engine

InteliLite Global Guide 80

5.4.4 Stabilization
When the Engine start (page 76) sequence is finished, the gen-set goes into the stabilization phase. There are
two timers (setpoints) in this phase:
Minimal Stabilization Time (page 171) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished. Generator
voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) and the GCB cannot be
closed even if the generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 172) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished. Generator
voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) but, opposite to the
previous timer, the GCB can be closed if generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
In situations where the GCB is closed automatically (AUTO, TEST modes), the closing of GCB will occur in the
first moment when the generator voltage and frequency will get into limits and the Minimal Stabilization Time
(page 171) has already elapsed.
In the event that the generator voltage or frequency are not within limits within the Maximal Stabilization Time
(page 172) period, the appropriate protection(s) will be activated and the gen-set will be cooled down and
stopped.
Note: The limits for the generator voltage and frequency are given by setpoints in the Group: Generator
settings (page 194).

Note: The value of the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 171) setpoint has to be lower than the value of Maximal
Stabilization Time (page 172) setpoint.

5.4.5 Connecting to load

When the Stabilization (page 81) phase is finished, the gen-set can be connected to the load.
The command for connecting the gen-set to the load is issued either automatically (AUTO, TEST modes) or
manually by pressing the GCB button. The following conditions must be valid:
The gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 171) timer has elapsed.
The gen-set voltage and frequency are within limits.

5.4.6 MRS operation

The "MRS function" represents manual or remote start of gen-set. It is ideal for prime power applications.

The MRS procedure

When the start command is detected, the following steps are performed:
The gen-set is started.
GCB is closed and the gen-set begins to supply the load (in AUTO mode, otherwise GCB button has to be
pressed)
When the stop command is detected, the following steps are performed:
GCB is opened and the gen-set stops supply the load.
After GCB is opened, the gen-set cools down and a stop.

5.4.7 Engine cool down and stop

The cool down phase follows after the stop command has been issued and the GCB has been opened.

InteliLite Global Guide 81

 Duration of the cool down phase is determined by the setpoint Cooling Time (page 174).
Cooling is performed either at nominal speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are evaluated) or
at idle speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are not evaluated). Selection of the speed is done
by the setpoint Cooling Speed (page 173).
The cool down can be finished manually in MAN mode by pressing the STOP button.
If a new start request comes, the cool down will be interrupted and the gen-set will go back to the
stabilization phase. If the cooling was at nominal speed, the stabilization timers will not count down again so
the GCB is ready to be closed (after 2 seconds delay).
When the cool down is finished, the output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) is de-energized and STOP SOLENOID
(PAGE 511) is energized. The engine will stop within the time period determined by the setpoint Stop Time (page
174). If the engine does not stop within this time, the alarm Wrn Stop Fail (page 576) will be issued.
The output STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 511) is energized until the engine is stopped, but at least for the duration of
Stop Time (page 174). If the Stop Time (page 174) has elapsed and the engine has still not stopped, the STOP
SOLENOID (PAGE 511) is de-energized for 5 s and then energized again for Stop Time (page 174) and this repeats
until the engine is stopped.
The output Ignition (page 503) is continuously energized until the engine is stopped.

Stopped gen-set evaluation

The gen-set is considered as stopped when all of following conditions are valid:
The engine speed is lower than 2 RPM.
The generator voltage in all phases is lower than 10 V.
None of Additional running engine indications (page 103) signals is active.

5.4.8 Alarm management

The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. Level 1 – yellow alarm – is a pre-critical alarm that is only
informative and does not take any action regarding gen-set control. Level 2 – red alarm – represents a critical
situation, where an action must be taken to prevent damage of the gen-set or technology.
One alarm of any type can be assigned to each binary input
Two alarms (one yellow and one red type) can be assigned to each analog input
There are also Built-in alarms (page 86) with fixed alarm types.
Each alarm is written to the Alarmlist (page 86).
Each alarm causes a record to be written into the history log.
Each alarm activates the Alarm and Horn output.
Each alarm can cause sending of a SMS message or an email.

InteliLite Global Guide 82

 Image 5.15 Analog input alarm evaluation principle

Alarm handling
There are three different alarm categories regarding the period when the alarms are evaluated. The category is
selectable for alarms assigned to binary/analog inputs and fixed for built-in alarms. The categories are the
following:
The alarm is evaluated all the time when the controller is switched on.
The alarm is evaluated only when the engine is running. This type should be used for e.g. oil pressure. These
alarms begin to be evaluated after the engine has been started with the delay given by the setpoint Protect
Hold Off (page 172).
The alarm is evaluated only when the generator is excited. These alarms begin to be evaluated after the
engine has been started and Maximal Stabilization Time (page 172) has elapsed or the GCB has been closed.
They remain evaluated until cooling has finished. Only Generator under/overvoltage, Generator voltage
unbalance and Generator under/overfrequency belong to this category. This category is not configurable to
binary and analog input alarms.
If an alarm is being evaluated and the appropriate alarm condition is fulfilled, the delay of evaluation will start to
run. The delay is adjustable by a setpoint (in the case of built-in alarms, analog input alarms) or is adjusted via
configuration window in LiteEdit2015 (in the case of binary input alarms). If the conditions persist, the alarm will
activate. The alarm will not activate if the condition is dismissed while the delay is still running.
After pressing the Fault reset button or activating the binary input FAULT RESET BUTTON (PAGE 453), all active
alarms change to confirmed state. Confirmed alarms will disappear from the Alarmlist as soon as the respective
condition dismisses. If the condition is dismissed before acknowledging the alarm, the alarm will remain in the
Alarmlist as Inactive.
Note: The input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 461) can be used for temporary disabling of red alarms to shutdown the
engine. This input may be used in situations where providing the power is extremely important – e.g. if the gen-
set drives pumps for fire extinguishers (sprinklers).

Alarm states
An alarm can have following states:

InteliLite Global Guide 83

 Active alarm: the alarm condition persists, alarm delay has elapsed.
Inactive alarm: the alarm condition has disappeared, but the alarm has not been confirmed.
Confirmed alarm: the alarm condition persists, but the alarm has already been confirmed.

Image 5.16 Alarm List

Alarm types - Level 1

The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level. This alarm does not cause any actions regarding the gen-set control.

Warning (Wrn)
The alarm appears in the Alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. Activates the output AL COMMON W RN
(PAGE 468) as well as the standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 502) and ALARM (PAGE 476)).

Alarm indication only

The alarm indication only alarm does not perform any actions regarding gen-set control. Alarm is only displayed
in alarmlist.

History record only (HistRecOnl)

The event is recorded into the history. Standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 502) and ALARM (PAGE 476)) are
not activated.

Alarm types - Level 2

The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.
Note: It is not possible to start the engine if any red level protection is active or not confirmed.

IMPORTANT: The gen-set can start by itself after acknowledging the alarms if there is no longer an
active red alarm and the controller is in AUTO or TEST mode!

Shutdown (Sd)
The alarm appears in the alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate stop of the Gen-set
without cooling phase. Also GCB breaker is open. The gen-set cannot be started again while there is a
shutdown alarm in the alarmlist. Activates the output AL COMMON SD (PAGE 468) as well as the standard alarm
outputs (HORN (PAGE 502) and ALARM (PAGE 476)).

InteliLite Global Guide 84

 Breaker open and cool down (BOC)
The event appears in the alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate opening of the GCB
and then the standard stop sequence with cooling follows. The gen-set cannot be started again while there is a
BOC alarm in the alarmlist. Activates the output AL COMMON BOC (PAGE 467) as well as the standard alarm
outputs (HORN (PAGE 502) and ALARM (PAGE 476)).

Sensor fail detection (FLS)

If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor fail will be detected and a
sensor fail message will appear in the Alarmlist (page 86). The valid range is defined by the most-left (RL) and
most-right (RH) points of the sensor characteristic ±12.5% from RH-RL.
Note: Sometimes there can be problem with lower limit of valid range which can be counted as negative
number. In this case the lower limit is set as one half of the RL point of the sensor curve characteristic.

Image 5.17 Sensor fail detection principle

Remote alarm messaging

If communication plug-in module is connected to the controller, the controller can send SMS messages and
emails at the moment when a new alarm appears in the Alarmlist (page 86) or new event is written in History
log (page 88). The message will contain a copy of the Alarmlist (page 86) or reasons from History log (page
88).
To enable this function, you should select adjust setpoints Event Message (page 329), Wrn Message (page 329),
BOC Message (page 329) and Sd Messages (page 330) to select the types of messages. Also enter a valid GSM
phone number or email address to the setpoints Telephone Number 1 (page 322), Telephone Number 2 (page
323), Telephone Number 3 (page 323), Telephone Number 4 (page 324), Email Address 1 (page 326) Email
Address 2 (page 326)Email Address 3 (page 327), and Email Address 4 (page 327).
The list of all supported terminals shows the table below:

InteliLite Global Guide 85

 Event Warning BOC Shutdown Event Warning BOC Shutdown
Terminal
SMS SMS SMS SMS email email email email
CM-RS232-485 no no no no no no no no
CM-Ethernet no no no no yes yes yes yes
CM-GPRS yes yes yes yes yes* yes* yes* yes*
CM-4G-GPS yes yes yes yes yes* yes* yes* yes*

Note: * Only in EMAIL+SMS mode.

Alarmlist
Alarmlist is a container of active and inactive alarms. It will appear automatically on the controller display, if a
new alarm occurs, or can be displayed manually from the display menu.
Active alarms are shown as inverted, not yet confirmed alarms are marked with asterisk before them.
Alarmlist contains three types of alarms:
Controller built-in alarms
User configured alarms on binary or analog inputs
ECU alarms

Controller built-in alarms

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC).
Then the alarm name follows. In some cases the prefix can be omitted.

User configured alarms

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC).
Alarm type is selected by user during the configuration of binary or analog input as alarm. Then the alarm name
follows. Name is adjusted by user during the configuration of binary or analog input as alarm.

ECU alarms
The ECU alarms are received from the ECU. The alarms are represented by the Diagnostic Trouble Code,
which contains information about the subsystem where the alarm occurred, the alarm type and the alarm
occurrence counter.
The most common fault codes are translated into text form. Other fault codes are displayed as a numeric code
and the engine fault codes list must be used to determine the reason.

Built-in alarms

Events Protection
Description
specification type
Value measured on analog input 1 is </> than Analog Protection 1
Analog Input 1 Wrn WRN
Wrn (page 202) setpoint.
Value measured on analog input 1 is </> than Analog Protection 1 Sd
Analog Input 1 Sd SD
(page 203) setpoint.
Value measured on analog input 2 is </> than Analog Protection 2
Analog Input 2 Wrn WRN
Wrn (page 205) setpoint.

InteliLite Global Guide 86

 Events Protection
Description
specification type
Value measured on analog input 2 is </> than Analog Protection 2 Sd
Analog Input 2 Sd SD
(page 206) setpoint.
Value measured on analog input 3 is </> than Analog Protection 3
Analog Input 3 Wrn WRN
Wrn (page 208) setpoint.
Value measured on analog input 3 is </> than Analog Protection 3 Sd
Analog Input 3 Sd SD
(page 209) setpoint.
Value measured on analog input 4 is </> than Analog Protection 4
Analog Input 4 Wrn WRN
Wrn (page 211) setpoint.
Value measured on analog input 4 is </> than Analog Protection 4 Sd
Analog Input 4 Sd SD
(page 212) setpoint.
Battery voltage is out of limits given by Battery < Voltage (page 190)
Wrn Battery Voltage WRN
and Battery > Voltage (page 190) setpoints.
Binary input Configurable Warning/BOC/Shutdown alarms on the binary inputs.
If the controller switches off during starting sequence (STARTER
Sd Battery Flat SD (PAGE 510) output is active) it doesn’t try to start again and activates
this protection (controller assumes bad battery condition).
Sd Start Fail SD Gen-set start failed. All crank attempts were tried without success.
Wrong check-sum of parameters. Happens typically after
downloading new firmware or changing of the parameter. The
Parameters Fail NONE
controller stays in INIT mode. Check all parameters, change value of
at least one parameter.
Sd Gen Lx >V
SD The generator voltage is out of limits given by Gen <V BOC and Gen
BOC Gen Lx <V
BOC >V Sd setpoints.
(where x=1,2,3)
BOC Gen V The generator voltage is unbalanced more than the value of Voltage
BOC
Unbalance Unbalance BOC (page 200) setpoint.
The generator frequency is out of limits given by Generator >
BOC Gen >,
BOC Frequency BOC (page 201) and Generator < Frequency BOC (page 201)
<Frequency
setpoints.
BOC Current The generator current is unbalanced more than the value of Current
BOC
Unbalance Unbalance BOC (page 197) setpoint.
Generator current exceeds the limit for IDMT protection given by
BOC Current IDMT BOC Nominal Current (page 156) and IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page 196)
setpoints.
The load is greater than the value given by Overload BOC (page 194)
BOC Overload BOC
setpoint.
This alarm is activated when Earth Fault value exceeds Earth Fault
Sd Earth Fault SD
Sd (page 340) limit for at least Earth Fault Delay (page 339) period.
The protection comes active if the speed is greater than Overspeed Sd
Sd Overspeed SD
(page 175) setpoint.

InteliLite Global Guide 87

 Events Protection
Description
specification type
During starting of the engine when the RPM reach the value of
Starting RPM (page 166) setpoint the starter is switched off and the
Sd Underspeed SD speed of the engine can drop under Starting RPM (page 166) again.
Then the Underspeed protection becomes active. Protection
evaluation starts 5 seconds after reaching Starting RPM (page 166).
If the input Emergency Stop is opened shutdown is immediately
Emergency Stop SD
activated.
GCB Fail SD Failure of generator circuit breaker.
Failure of magnetic pick-up sensor for speed measurement. This
alarm appears, if starter was disengaged for other reason than
Sd RPM
SD overcrossing Starting RPM (page 166) (like oil pressure or D+) and at
Measurement Fail
the end of timer Maximum Cranking Time (page 165) there are no
RPMs > Starting RPM (page 166) detected.
Gen-set stop failed. See description at Gen-set Operation States
Wrn Stop Fail WRN
chapter.
The period for servicing is set by the Maintenance Timer 1 (page 188)
Wrn Maintenance 1 WRN
setpoint. The protection comes if counter reaches zero.
The period for servicing is set by the Maintenance Timer 2 (page 189)
Wrn Maintenance 2 WRN
setpoint. The protection comes if counter reaches zero.
The period for servicing is set by the Maintenance Timer 3 (page 189)
Wrn Maintenance 3 WRN
setpoint. The protection comes if counter reaches zero.
Charge Alternator
WRN Failure of alternator for charging the battery.
Fail
Sd Override WRN The protection is active if the output Sd Override is closed.
Genset voltage phases are not wired correctly. GCB closing is
Generator CCW Rot WRN
prohibited by chontroller.

Note: This table does not contain all alarms in controller. It is only list of the most common alarms.

5.4.9 History log

The history log is an area in the controller’s non-volatile memory that records “snapshots” of the system at
moments when important events occur. The history log is important especially for diagnostics of failures and
problems. When the history file is full, the oldest records are removed.
Each record has the same structure and contains:
• The event which caused the record (e.g. “Overspeed alarm” or “GCB closed”)
• The date and time when it was recorded
• All important data values like RPM, kW, voltages, etc. from the moment that the event occurred.

InteliLite Global Guide 88

 Record structure

Name Abbreviation Description

Row number (0 corresponds to the last record, -1 to the previous
Number No.
one, etc.)
Reason Reason Reason for history record (any event or alarm related to the gen-set
Time Time Time
Date Date Date
RPM RPM Engine rotations per minute
Power Pwr Generator active power
Reactive power Q Generator reactive power
Power Factor PF Generator power factor
Load Character LChr Generator load character
Generator
Gfrq Generator Frequency
Frequency
Generator Voltage Vg1 Generator voltage Ph1
Generator Voltage Vg2 Generator voltage Ph2
Generator Voltage Vg3 Generator voltage Ph3
Generator Voltage Vg12 Generator voltage Ph12
Generator Voltage Vg23 Generator voltage Ph23
Generator Voltage Vg31 Generator voltage Ph31
Generator Current Ig1 Generator current Ph1
Generator Current Ig2 Generator current Ph2
Generator Current Ig3 Generator current Ph3
Voltage Battery VBat Voltage of battery
Analog Input 1 Ain1 Analog input 1
Analog Input 2 Ain2 Analog input 2
Analog Input 3 Ain3 Analog input 3
Analog Input 4 Ain4 Analog input 4
Binary Inputs BIN Controller binary inputs
Binary Outputs BOUT Controller binary outputs
Controller Mode Mode Controller mode

Note: When some setpoint is changed, in history log is written its number of communication object.

5.4.10 Breaker control

The following power switches are controlled by the controller:
The generator circuit breaker or contactor – GCB
It is possible to use either a motorized circuit breaker or contactor. Below is a list of available control outputs
that should fit all types of contactors or breakers. The following rules must be kept to when designing the wiring
of power switches:

InteliLite Global Guide 89

 The control outputs must be configured and wiring of the power switches must be provided in such a way,
that the controller has full control over the breakers – i.e. the controller can open and close the breaker at any
time.
The breaker must respond within max. 5 seconds to a close and open command. Special attention should be
paid to opening of motorized circuit breakers, as it could take more than 5 seconds on some types. In such
cases it is necessary to use an undervoltage coil for fast opening.
After opening the breaker, there is internal delay for another closing of breaker. Delay is 6 seconds - 5
seconds for OFF coil and 1 second for UV coil. After these 6 seconds, breaker can be closed again. For
opening of breaker there is no delay.

Breaker control outputs

An output for control of a contactor. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
Close/Open controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise
an alarm is issued.
An output giving a 5 second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed. The output is
ON coil
intended for control of close coils of circuit breakers.
An output giving a pulse in the moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until
OFF coil the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5 seconds. The output is intended for control of
open coils of circuit breakers.
The GCB UV coil output is active the whole time the gen-set is running (not in idle or cooling).
UV coil The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the breaker has to be
switched off. The output is intended for control of undervoltage coils of circuit breakers.

Image 5.18 Breaker control outputs

Breaker fail detection

Breaker fail detection is based on binary output breaker close/open comparing with binary input breaker
feedback.

InteliLite Global Guide 90

 IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure breaker feedback to use this function.

IMPORTANT: Also it is possible to use breakers without feedbacks. In this case there is check of
breaker real state.

There are three different time delays for breaker fail detection – see following diagrams.
When binary output breaker close/open is in steady state and breaker feedback is changed the breaker fail is
detected immediately (no delay).

Image 5.19 Breaker fail - breaker close/open in steady position - open

Image 5.20 Breaker fail - breaker close/open in steady position - close

When binary output breaker close/open opens there is 5 sec delay for breaker fail detection.

InteliLite Global Guide 91

 Image 5.21 Breaker fail - breaker close/open opens

When binary output breaker close/open closes there is 5 sec delay for breaker fail detection.

Image 5.22 Breaker fail - breaker close/open closes

5.4.11 Exercise timers

There are 2 exercise (general-purpose) timers in the controller. The timers are intended for scheduling of any
operations such as e.g. periodic tests of the gen-set, scheduled transfer of the load to the gen-set prior to an
expected disconnection of the mains etc.
Related setpoints for timer 1 are:
Timer 1 Function (page 264) Timer 1 Day (page 269)
Timer 1 Repetition (page 265) Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 270)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 266) Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 270)
Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 266) Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 271)
Timer 1 Duration (page 266) Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 268)
Timer 1 Repeated (page 267) Timer 1 Weekends (page 269)
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 270)

InteliLite Global Guide 92

 Related setpoints for timer 2 are:
Timer 2 Function (page 271) Timer 2 Day (page 276)
Timer 2 Repetition (page 272) Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week (page 277)
Timer 2 First Occur. Date (page 273) Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month (page 277)
Timer 2 Start Time (page 273) Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month (page 278)
Timer 2 Duration (page 273) Timer 2 Refresh Period (page 275)
Timer 2 Repeated (page 274) Timer 2 Weekends (page 276)
Timer 2 Repeat Day (page 277)

Available modes of each timer:

This is a single shot mode. The timer will be activated only once at preset date/time for preset
Once
duration.
The timer is activated every "x-th" day. The day period "x" is adjustable. Weekends can be
Daily
excluded. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd day excluding Saturdays and Sundays.
The timer is activated every "x-th" week on selected weekdays. The week period "x" is
Weekly
adjustable. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd week on Monday and Friday.
The timer is activated every "x-th" month on the selected day. The requested day can be
Monthly selected either as "y-th" day in the month or as "y-th" weekday in the month. E.g. the timer can
be adjusted to every 1st month on 1st Tuesday.
Short
The timer is repeated with adjusted period (hh:mm). The timer duration is included in the period.
period

Once mode
Set-up via LiteEdit2015
To set-up timer via LiteEdit2015 go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264).

InteliLite Global Guide 93

 Image 5.23 Once mode - LiteEdit2015

In timer mode select Once. In timer settings adjust date and time of occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration
of timer.

Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 264)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 265) setpoint select Once
mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 266), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 266) and Timer 1
Duration (page 266).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

Daily mode
Set-up via LiteEdit2015
To set-up timer via LiteEdit2015 go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264).

InteliLite Global Guide 94

 Image 5.24 Daily mode - LiteEdit2015

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Daily. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th day of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 268)) and behavior of timer on weekends (Timer 1 Weekends (page 269)).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 3rd day at 12:00 for 1 hour including weekends.

Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 264)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 265) setpoint select
Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 266), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 266) and
Timer 1 Duration (page 266). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 267) select Daily and adjust Timer 1 Refresh
Period (page 268) (x-th day of repetition) and Timer 1 Weekends (page 269) (behavior of timer on weekends).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

Weekly mode
Set-up via LiteEdit2015
To set-up timer via LiteEdit2015 go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264).

InteliLite Global Guide 95

 Image 5.25 Weekly mode - LiteEdit2015

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Weekly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th week of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 268)) and days when timer should be active (Timer 1 Day (page 269)).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 2nd week on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 264)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 265) setpoint select
Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 266), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 266) and
Timer 1 Duration (page 266). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 267) select Weekly and adjust Timer 1 Day
(page 269) (days when timer should be active) and Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 268) (x-th week of repetition).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

Monthly mode
Set-up via LiteEdit2015
To set-up timer via LiteEdit2015 go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264).

InteliLite Global Guide 96

 There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.

Image 5.26 Monthly mode - LiteEdit2015

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition and the x-th day of repetition (Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 270)). Than select the x-th month of
repetition.
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 2nd day in 2nd month at 12:00 for 1 hour.

InteliLite Global Guide 97

 Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.

Image 5.27 Monthly mode - LiteEdit2015

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition, the x-th week of repetition and days in week. Than select the x-th month of repetition.
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 2nd week in 2nd month on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

Set-up via controller interface

There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.
In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 264)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 265) setpoint select
Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 266), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 266) and
Timer 1 Duration (page 266). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 267) select Monthly and adjust type of monthly
repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 270), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 268) (x-th month of repetition) and
Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 270) (concrete day in repeated months).
Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.
In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 264)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 265) setpoint select
Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 266), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 266) and
Timer 1 Duration (page 266). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 267) select Monthly and adjust type of monthly
repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 270), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 268) (x-th month of repetition), Timer
1 Repeated Day In Week (page 270) (days in week when timer is active) and Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month
(page 271) (concrete week in repeated months).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

InteliLite Global Guide 98

 Short period mode
Set-up via LiteEdit2015
To set-up timer via LiteEdit2015 go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264).

Image 5.28 Short period mode - LiteEdit2015

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Short period. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the interval of repetition
(shorter than 1 day).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 4th hour for 1 hour.

Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 264)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 265) setpoint select
Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 266), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 266) and
Timer 1 Duration (page 266). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 267) select Short Period and adjust Timer 1
Refresh Period (page 268) (interval of repetition).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

5.4.12 Rental Timers

In controller are two timers which are designed like rental timer. Rental timers will stop gen-set after their
elapse.

InteliLite Global Guide 99

 How to set-up rental timer
This is a short guide for settings of rental timers. Please see following few steps how to set up rental timers:
Choose the type of rental timer
Rental Timer 1 (page 278) (based on engine running hours)
Rental Timer 2 (page 280) (based on date)
Adjust the length of chosen timer
Adjust the warning for user Rental Timer 1 Wrn (page 280) or Rental Timer 2 Wrn (page 282)(warning will be
displayed in alarmlist before elapsing of rental timer)
Adjust Rental Timer BOC (page 282) - common for both timers (if engine is still running after rental timer
counts down, this timer will starts count down and after elapse of timer the gen-set will be cooled down and
stop)

5.4.13 Service timers

Service timers are used as maintenance interval counters. Counters can be set by setpoints - Maintenance
Timer 1 (page 188), Maintenance Timer 2 (page 189) and Maintenance Timer 3 (page 189). All of them work the
same way - their values are decremented every hour when the gen-set is running.
Actual value of counters is located either as the same setpoints Maintenance Timer 1 (page 188), Maintenance
Timer 2 (page 189) and Maintenance Timer 3 (page 189) or as values Maintenance 1 (page 421), Maintenance 2
(page 422) and Maintenance 3 (page 422).
When the value of counter reaches 0, the alarm Wrn Maintenance 1 (page 574) or Wrn Maintenance 2 (page
574) or Wrn Maintenance 3 (page 574) is active until the respective counter is readjusted back to nonzero
value.
Unused timer has to be adjusted to maximal value 10000 (OFF).

5.4.14 Analog switches

There are logical analog function dedicated for analog switches. Each analog switch has setpoints for level ON
and level OFF and logical binary output.

Analog switch Setpoints Binary output

Analog Switch 1 On (page 204)
AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 536) ANALOG SWITCH 1 (PAGE 476)
Analog Switch 1 Off (page 205)
Analog Switch 2 On (page 207)
AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 536) ANALOG SWITCH 2 (PAGE 477)
Analog Switch 2 Off (page 208)
Analog Switch 3 On (page 210)
AIN SWITCH 03 (PAGE 536) ANALOG SWITCH 3 (PAGE 477)
Analog Switch 3 Off (page 211)
Analog Switch 4 On (page 213)
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478)
Analog Switch 4 Off (page 214)
Analog Switch 5 On (page 216)
AIN SWITCH 05 (PAGE 537) ANALOG SWITCH 5 (PAGE 478)
Analog Switch 5 Off (page 217)
Analog Switch 6 On (page 219)
AIN SWITCH 06 (PAGE 537) ANALOG SWITCH 6 (PAGE 479)
Analog Switch 6 Off (page 220)

InteliLite Global Guide 100

 Analog switch Setpoints Binary output
Analog Switch 7 On (page 222)
AIN SWITCH 07 (PAGE 538) ANALOG SWITCH 7 (PAGE 479)
Analog Switch 7 Off (page 223)
Analog Switch 8 On (page 225)
AIN SWITCH 08 (PAGE 538) ANALOG SWITCH 8 (PAGE 480)
Analog Switch 8 Off (page 226)
Analog Switch 9 On (page 228)
AIN SWITCH 09 (PAGE 538) ANALOG SWITCH 9 (PAGE 480)
Analog Switch 9 Off (page 229)
Analog Switch 10 On (page 231)
AIN SWITCH 10 (PAGE 539) ANALOG SWITCH 10 (PAGE 481)
Analog Switch 10 Off (page 232)
Analog Switch 11 On (page 234)
AIN SWITCH 11 (PAGE 539) ANALOG SWITCH 11 (PAGE 481)
Analog Switch 11 Off (page 235)
Analog Switch 12 On (page 237)
AIN SWITCH 12 (PAGE 539) ANALOG SWITCH 12 (PAGE 482)
Analog Switch 12 Off (page 238)
Analog Switch 13 On (page 240)
AIN SWITCH 13 (PAGE 540) ANALOG SWITCH 13 (PAGE 482)
Analog Switch 13 Off (page 241)
Analog Switch 14 On (page 243)
AIN SWITCH 14 (PAGE 540) ANALOG SWITCH 14 (PAGE 483)
Analog Switch 14 Off (page 244)
Analog Switch 15 On (page 246)
AIN SWITCH 15 (PAGE 540) ANALOG SWITCH 15 (PAGE 483)
Analog Switch 15 Off (page 247)
Analog Switch 16 On (page 249)
AIN SWITCH 16 (PAGE 541) ANALOG SWITCH 16 (PAGE 484)
Analog Switch 16 Off (page 250)
Analog Switch 17 On (page 252)
AIN SWITCH 17 (PAGE 541) ANALOG SWITCH 17 (PAGE 484)
Analog Switch 17 Off (page 253)
Analog Switch 18 On (page 255)
AIN SWITCH 18 (PAGE 541) ANALOG SWITCH 18 (PAGE 485)
Analog Switch 18 Off (page 256)
Analog Switch 19 On (page 258)
AIN SWITCH 19 (PAGE 542) ANALOG SWITCH 19 (PAGE 485)
Analog Switch 19 Off (page 259)
Analog Switch 20 On (page 261)
AIN SWITCH 20 (PAGE 542) ANALOG SWITCH 20 (PAGE 486)
Analog Switch 20 Off (page 262)

The behaviour of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints.

Image 5.29 Principle of analog switch

InteliLite Global Guide 101

5.4.15 Flowchart

Image 5.30 Basic flowchart of controller sequences

InteliLite Global Guide 102

5.4.16 Additional running engine indications
It is helpful to have information other than speed (RPM), whether the engine is rotating or not, especially if RPM
is measured from the generator frequency instead of magnetic pickup. The generator frequency measurement
can be unreliable at very low speeds and/or may have a delayed reaction to sudden and big changes (i.e. in the
moment that the engine has just started…).
The following conditions are evaluated as additional running engine indication:
Voltage on the D+ input is higher than 80% of battery voltage. Connect this input to the D+ (L) terminal of the
charging alternator and enable the D+ function by the setpoint D+ Function. If D+ terminal is not available,
leave the input unconnected and disable the function.
The pickup is not used and frequency is not detected on the pickup input. Connect the pickup input to the W
terminal of the charging alternator if you do not use pickup and the W terminal is available. If not, leave the
input unconnected.
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 167) setpoint. The oil pressure is evaluated from the analog input or
from the ECU if an ECU is configured.
At least one phase of generator voltage is >25% of nominal voltage.
These signals are used during start for powering down the starter motor even if still no RPM is measured and
also during stop in order to evaluate if the engine is really stopped.

5.4.17 Voltage phase sequence detection

Controller detects phase sequence voltage terminals. This protection is important after controller installation to
avoid wrong voltage phase connection. There is fix defined phase sequence in controller L1, L2, L3. When the
phases are connected in different order (e.g. L1,L3,L2 or L2,L1,L3) following alarms are detected:
Generator CCW Rotation (page 578)

5.4.18 Gen-set operation states

Engine state machine

Init Autotest during controller power on.

Gen-set is not ready to start.
Not ready
Example: When shutdown alarm is active or unit is in OFF mode.
Prestart sequence in process, PRESTART (PAGE 506) output is closed.
Prestart
Example: Usually used for preheating or processes executed prior gen-set start.
Cranking Engine is cranking, STARTER (PAGE 510) output is closed
Pause Pause between start attempts.
Starting Starting speed is reached and the Idle timer is running.
Running Gen-set is running at nominal speed.
Loaded Gen-set is running at nominal speed and GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 495) is closed.
Stop.
Stop
Example: Automatic or manual stop command was issued, engine is stopping.
Shutdown Shut-down alarm activated.

InteliLite Global Guide 103

 Ready Gen-set is ready to run.
Cooling Gen-set is cooling before stop.
EMERGENCY MAN (PAGE 452) gen-set operation.
EmergMan
Example: Used for bypass the controller and engine manual start.

Engine started conditions

Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 166) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 167) or
D+ terminal active (reached 80% of supply voltage) for minimum 1s or
Generator voltage > 25% of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159) (any
phase)
Note: Any of these condition will disconnect starter of the engine, however for transition to next state RPM
needs to be higher than Starting RPM (page 166).

Engine running conditions

Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 166) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 167) or
Generator voltage > 25% of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158)

Still engine conditions

Engine speed (RPM) < Starting RPM (page 166) or
Oil pressure < Starting Oil Pressure (page 167) or
Generator voltage < 50V (any phase)

Note: When the engine was running before and all above conditions are fulfilled, additional 2s delay is
necessary to confirm “still engine”.

When any engine running conditions are appeared on still engine than the Wrn Stop Fail (page 576) is
activated with following delay:
for generator voltage from 10V to < 50% of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1s
for generator voltage > 50% of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 200ms
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 167), Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1s
for detected RPM, there is no delay.

Stop engine conditions

If no engine running conditions are validated than the controller will wait extra 12s before leaving the Machine
state Stop and than it will release the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 511) output.

InteliLite Global Guide 104

 Image 5.31 Engine stops in Stop Time (page 174)

When the total time of stopping will exceed setpoint Stop Time (page 174) than the Wrn Stop Fail (page 576)
and binary outputs are activated. The controller will continuously try to stop the engine.

Image 5.32 Engine stops after first Stop Time (page 174)

Electric state machine

BrksOff GCB opened

5.4.19 Sensor curves

Background of the sensor calibration
To correct measuring error of each analog input (pressure, temperature, level, etc.) calibrating constants should
be set. Calibration is made by adding the value of setpoint Analog Input 1 Calibration (page 288), or Analog Input

InteliLite Global Guide 105

 2 Calibration (page 289), or Analog Input 3 Calibration (page 289), or Analog Input 4 Calibration (page 290) directly
to the calculated value at analog input.
Note: The calibration must be done at the operational point of the analog input (e.g. 80°C, 4.0Bar etc..)

Default sensor curves

There are 16 default resistive curves available. The following table provides information on minimum/maximum
values of respective sensors. Actual values especially of temperature curves may differ. Meaning is to prolong
curve to the lower temperature values, so the cold engine will not raise alarm fail sensor.

Curve Min [Ohm] Max [Ohm] Units

VDO 10 Bar 0-2400ohm 0 2400 Bar
VDO40-120°C0-2400ohm 0 2400 °C
VDOLevel%0-2400ohm 0 2400 %
General line 1 0 1000 ohm
General line 2 0 1000 ohm
General line 3 0 1000 ohm
General line 4 0 1000 ohm
General line 5 0 1000 ohm
General line 6 0 1000 ohm
General line 7 0 1000 ohm
General line 8 0 1000 ohm
General line 9 0 1000 ohm
General line 10 0 1000 ohm
General line 11 0 1000 ohm
General line 12 0 1000 ohm
General line 13 0 1000 ohm

Note: Curves can be modified via LiteEdit2015. In LiteEdit2015 are also prepared some standard curves.

IMPORTANT: For right behavior of FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 544) function, curve for this analog input has
to be in percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 185) has to be adjusted correctly.

6 back to Functions

InteliLite Global Guide 106

5.4.20 PLC
PLC Editor is powerful tool which helps you to create your own PLC scheme. It has graphical interface to have
user interface easy to use.

Image 5.33 PLC Editor main page

List of available PLC blocks

PLC block Number of blocks

OR/AND 16
XOR/RS 2
Comparator with hysteresis (Comp Hyst) 2
Comparator with delay (Comp Time) 2
Timer 1
Delay 2
Force history record (Force Hist) 2
Force protection (Force Prot) 2

Working with the editor

If the currently opened archive does not contain any PLC program, then an empty drawing is created
automatically when you select the PLC Editor. The procedure of creation of a PLC drawing (program) contains

InteliLite Global Guide 107

 following essential steps:
Adjust the sheet to your needs. See Working with sheets (page 108) for more information.
Add PLC blocks into the sheets. See Adding PLC blocks (page 108) for more information.
Define inputs and outputs of the PLC program. See Define inputs and outputs (page 109) for more
information.
Create connections between inputs, blocks and outputs. See Creating wires (page 111) for more
information.
Adjust properties of the blocks. See List of PLC blocks (page 548) for more information about blocks.

Working with sheets

Drag the sheet edges to re-size the sheet according to your needs.

Image 5.34 Adjusting PLC sheet

Adding PLC blocks

Adding PLC block is simple and intuitive. Follow the procedure below to add PLC block.
Select required block from the list of available PLC blocks at the left and drag it into the sheet
Double-click on the block and adjust properties of the block. See List of PLC blocks (page 548) for more
information about blocks.
Connect the block inputs and outputs by drawing wires in the sheet. See Define inputs and outputs (page
109) for more information. It is also possible to connected inputs and outputs via properties of selected PLC
block.

InteliLite Global Guide 108

 Image 5.35 Adding PLC blocks

Note: To delete PLC block just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can by used.

Note: To see context help for selected PLC block just press F1 button.

Define inputs and outputs

Image 5.36 Blank sheet of PLC editor

Inputs
Sheet inputs are located at the left side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.

InteliLite Global Guide 109

 Double-click on a free input position or existing input to add new input or edit the existing one.
Select the source for the input.
If you create a binary input, you can select a source from following categories:
Bin. Values - this category contains all binary values available in the controller as binary inputs,
logical binary outputs etc.
PLC Outputs - this category contains all PLC blocks binary outputs available in the controller
If you create an analog input, you can select a source from following categories:
Ana. Values - this category contains all analog values available in the controller as analog inputs,
electrical values, values from ECU etc.
All Setpoints - this category contains all setpoints of the controller except the dedicated PLC
setpoints. Names, resolutions and dimensions of these setpoints can not be modified
PLC Setpoints - this category contains a group of setpoints which are dedicated for using in the PLC
program. PLC setpoints can be renamed, their dimension, resolution and limits can be modified
according to need of PLC blocks where they are used

Image 5.37 PLC inputs

InteliLite Global Guide 110

 Outputs
Sheet outputs are located at the right side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.
Doubleclick on a free output position to add new sheet output
Doubleclick on an already created output to configure the output onto a controller output terminal or a logical
binary input (first of all some PLC block output has to be connected to this output to enable configuration of
output)

Image 5.38 PLC outputs

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to click on Connect button after selecting the output. Otherwise PLC
output is not connected to output.

Creating wires
Wires can be create between PLC inputs and PLC blocks and between PLC blocks and PLC outputs.
IMPORTANT: Keep the order of starting and finishing connection points. Wires between inputs and
blocks have to start from inputs. Wires between blocks and outputs have to start from blocks.

Follow the procedure below to create wire.

InteliLite Global Guide 111

 Locate the mouse pointer over the starting point of the wire. If the area under the mouse pointer is a
connection point, the pointer will change the color (fill of pointer will be white).
Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the wire to the destination of required connection point. If you
point over a valid connection point, the connection point will be marked with a red circle.
Release the left mouse button to create a wire between the two points. The wire is routed automatically.

Note: It is possible to make connection only between the outputs and inputs with the same type of value (binary
or analog). Binary values are marker by black pointer, analog values are marked with green pointer.

Note: To delete wire just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can by used.

PLC logic execution rules

The PLC program is executed every 100ms. The blocks are executed in order according to block numbers (item
numbers), which are indicated in each block. The block numbers are assigned automatically according to
position on sheet.

Image 5.39 PLC execution logic

IMPORTANT: Please always check that the blocks are ordered correctly, especially if you use direct
feedbacks from outputs to inputs within one sheet. Wrong order may lead to incorrect results!!!

InteliLite Global Guide 112

 Other functions
Consistency check
Use this function to check if all inputs and outputs of PLC block are connected.

Delete whole content of sheet

Use this function to delete the whole content of sheet (including blocks, wires, inputs, outputs, etc...).

Hints
Use this function to enable or disable quick hints for blocks (controller help is not affected by this function).

PLC monitor
PLC monitor is a powerful tool for monitoring your PLC. Just click on PLC monitor button on main LiteEdit2015
page to see you PLC. Active inputs and outputs have blue color. Also wires with active signals have blue color.
IMPORTANT: It is not possible to edit PLC in PLC monitor tool.

5.4.21 Geo-fencing
Geo-fencing function is kind of protection that evaluates whether the actual GPS location is within predefined
area and based on the evaluation takes an action (sends sms, stops engine, make history record etc.). Function
is enabled by setpoint Geo-Fencing (page 285) or by logical binary input GEO-FENCING ENABLED (PAGE 456).
Using LiteEdit2015, it is possible to set two concentric geo-circles within which the unit is allowed to be located.
Each geo-circle is defined as circular geographic area with centre (common for both geo-circles) named Home
Position adjusted via setpoints Home Latitude (page 283) and Home Longitude (page 283) and radius named
Fence Radius adjusted via setpoints .Fence Radius 1 (page 284) and Fence Radius 2 (page 284).
Protections can be different for both circles. Protection are adjusted via setpoints Fence 1 Protection (page 286)
and Fence 2 Protection (page 287).
It is also possible to see the current position of the controller in WebSupervisor map view.

5.4.22 Tier 4 Final

Tier 4 Final support generally provides monitoring and control of after-treatment system installed on generators
engine. The requirements are defined as:

InteliLite Global Guide 113

 Providing After-Treatment status information by
displaying universal lamps (icons)
displaying analog and binary values
Control of After-Treatment regeneration function by
transmitting commands to the ECU

Providing After-Treatment status information

After-Treatment screen
This screen is shown with configured ECU which supports Tier 4 Final. After-Treatment screen is automatically
shown, once any of selected lamps gets active or change status. Deactivating of the lamp will not trigger
showing the screen. The screen is then shown until operator switch it to another one. Alarmlist screen has lower
priority so even new alarm appears, After-treatment screen is still displayed. To avoid displaying blank screen,
inactive lamps are represented by "dotted" icons. For no active lamp the screen shows all dotted icons. Please
see examples below:

Image 5.40 Example of active Tier 4 Final screen

Image 5.41 Example of inactive Tier 4 Final screen

InteliLite Global Guide 114

 Universal lamps (icons)
Universal lamp icons are shown on the After-Treatment screen. Based on specific value read in specific frame
with specific SPN is every lamp icon either:
shown
hidden
blinking slow (1Hz)
blinking fast (2Hz)

Note: Lamp icon blinking is defined as displaying active lamp icon and inverse colored active lamp icon in
required frequency.

Lamp name Active icon Inactive icon Notes

Note: This value can light

Amber warning lamp or blink on both
frequencies.

Note: This value can light

Red stop lamp or blink on both
frequencies.

Engine wait to start lamp

Note: DPF = Diesel

Particulate Filter; SCR =
Selective Catalytic
DPF/SCR lamp command
Reduction. This lamp also
activates alarm After-
Treatment (page 576).

Note: This lamp also

Exhaust system high temperature
activates alarm After-
lamp command
Treatment (page 576).

InteliLite Global Guide 115

 Lamp name Active icon Inactive icon Notes

Note: This value can light

or blink on both
Malfunction indicator lamp frequencies. This lamp also
activates alarm After-
Treatment (page 576).

Note: This lamp also

Fluid tank low level indicator activates alarm After-
Treatment (page 576).

Note: Indicates the state of

diesel particulate filter
active regeneration
DPF regeneration inhibited
inhibition. This lamp also
activates alarm After-
Treatment (page 576).

Analog values
Supported analog values:
DPF Ash Load (page 407)
DPF Soot Load (page 407)
DEF Level (page 407) (available on main measurement screen - see description of setpoint Main Screen (page
164))

Control of After-Treatment regeneration function

User can force or inhibit regeneration process by activating appropriate binary inputs of the controller. Please
see the list of binary inputs below:
FORCE REGENERATION (PAGE 453)
REGENERATION INHIB (PAGE 459)

5.4.23 Alternate configuration

In controller are 3 sets of configuration.

InteliLite Global Guide 116

 Configuration set 1 Configuration set 2 Configuration set 3
Nominal RPM 1 (page 291) Nominal RPM 2 (page 294) Nominal RPM 3 (page 296)
Nominal Frequency 1 (page 291) Nominal Frequency 2 (page 293) Nominal Frequency 3 (page 295)
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 (page 292) Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page 294) Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page 296)
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 (page 292) Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page 294) Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page 296)
Nominal Current 1 (page 291) Nominal Current 2 (page 293) Nominal Current 3 (page 295)
Connection Type 1 (page 290) Connection type 2 (page 293) Connection type 3 (page 295)
ECU Frequency Select 1 (page 297) ECU Frequency Select 2 (page 298) ECU Frequency Select 3 (page 299)
ECU Speed Adjustment 1 (page 297) ECU Speed Adjustment 2 (page 298) ECU Speed Adjustment 3 (page 299)

Configuration sets can be changed via logical binary inputs CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) and CONFIGURATION
3 (PAGE 450). Configuration set is active when there is no input activated. In case that inputs CONFIGURATION 2
(PAGE 450) and CONFIGURATION 3 (PAGE 450) are active at the same time, the configuration set 3 is took in
account.

CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) CONFIGURATION 3 (PAGE 450) Active configuration set

0 0 1
1 0 2
0 1 3
1 0 3

InteliLite Global Guide 117

6 Communication
6.1 PC 118
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 131

6 back to Table of contents

6.1 PC
6.1.1 Direct communication 118
6.1.2 Remote communication 120

6.1.1 Direct communication

A RS232, USB, RS485 or ethernet interface can be used for direct cable connection to a PC.

Connection via RS232

A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS232 connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 41.
RS232 interface uses COM1 Mode (page 300) port of the controller. Use a cross-wired serial communication
cable with DB9 female connectors and signals Rx, Tx, GND.
Note: Also USB-RS232 convertor can be used.

Image 6.1 Cross-wired RS232 cable is used

Image 6.2 Cross-wired RS232 cable and USB is used

Connection via RS485

A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS485 connection.

InteliLite Global Guide 118

 The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 41.
RS485 interface uses COM2 Mode (page 301) port of the controller. Use a cross-wired serial communication
cable with DB9 female connectors and signals Rx, Tx, GND.
Note: Also USB-RS485 convertor can be used.

Image 6.3 RS485 cable is used

Connection via Ethernet

A plug-in communication module CM-Ethernet is necessary for ethernet connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 41.
This connection type is used for communication with the controller from LiteEdit2015 or any other PC tool. This
connection can be used regardless of AirGate is switched on or off. Only three remote clients can be connected
at the same time (via AirGate only two remote clients at the same time).
To connect your PC tool to the controller use the INTERNET connection type and just put the CM-Ethernet IP
address into the gen-set address box in the PC tool. If you do not use the default ComAp TCP Port (page 338) 23,
then you also have to specify the port number using a colon.

Image 6.4 Ethernet cable is used

Connection via USB

USB interface uses HID profile.

Image 6.5 Shielded USB type A cable is used

6 back to Communication

InteliLite Global Guide 119

6.1.2 Remote communication
A PC can be connected to the controller also remotely via CM-GPRS or CM-Ethernet plug-in module.
IMPORTANT: Factory default password and access code are "0". It is highly recommended to
change these parameters.

Ethernet LAN connection

Direct IP LAN connection is intended to be used if the CM-Ethernet module is reachable from the client
computer by specifying the IP address at which the module can be contacted.
If direct IP connection is to be used within a local network the CM-Ethernet must have static IP address in
the respective local network.
Note: If you have troubles with setting up static and public IP address for direct connection from Internet use
AirGate connection instead.

Image 6.6 Ethernet LAN connection

Setting-up static IP address

There are two basic ways to get the static IP address.
First way is to switch theCM-Ethernet to manual IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode (page
332) to FIXED. In that case all setpoints of IP settings(IP Address (page 332), Subnet Mask (page 333), Gateway
IP (page 333), DNS IP Address 1 (page 334)) have to be adjusted manually. If this method is used several basic
rules should be kept to avoid conflicts with the remaining network infrastructure:
The static IP used in the controller must be selected in accordance with the local network in which CM-
Ethernet is connected.
The static IP used in the controller must be excluded from the pool of addresses which is assigned by
DHCP server, which is in charge of the respective local network.
The local infrastructure must generally allow using devices with manually assigned IP addresses.
There must not be any other device using the same static IP address. This can be tested from a computer
connected to the same network using "ping <required_ip_address>" command issued from the command
line. The IP address is not occupied if there is not any response to the ping command.
Note: The list above contains only basic rules. Other specific restrictions/rules may take place depending on
the local network security policy, technology used, topology etc.

InteliLite Global Guide 120

 Next way is to switch the CM-Ethernet to automatic IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode
(page 332) to AUTOMATIC. In that case all IP settings are assigned by DHCP server. Then configure the
DHCP server to assign always the same IP address (i.e. static IP address) to the particular CM-Ethernet
according to it's MAC address.

Internet connection
Public static IP
If public static IP connection is to be used from the Internet, the IP address, which is entered into the client
computer, must be static and public in scope of the Internet.
If CM-Ethernet is connected to Internet via a local ethernet network then in most cases port forwarding
must be created from the public IP address of the network gateway to the local IP address of CM-
Ethernet at the port specified for ComAp protocol. Different port numbers can be used to create multiple
port forwarding rules in the same local network.

AirGate
This connection type is intended for remote connection from LiteEdit2015,or any other ComAp PC tool over the
Internet in situations, where obtaining fixed public IP address is not possible. Only two remote clients can be
connected at the same time.
This connection type is active if AirGate connection is enabled. Setpoint AirGate Address (page 337) must
contain AirGate server address. It can be entered in text form as well as numeric form. There is a public AirGate
server available at address "airgate.comap.cz".
Once the controller is attached to the Internet and the AirGate server address is properly adjusted then the
controller registers automatically to the server and an identification string AirGate ID is given to a controller,
which is visible at the controller screen.
To connect your PC tool to the controller use the AirGate connection, put the the same AirGate address as in
the controller into the AIRGATE ADDRESS field and use the AirGate ID displayed on the controller.

InteliLite Global Guide 121

 SMS

Event SMS
The InteliLite controller equipped with the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication module is able to send
Event SMS according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 329)

Note: Firstly setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 322) has to be adjusted.

The following events can be received by mobile phone:

Engine Start/Stop
Manual Start/Stop
Remote Start/Stop
Load on Gen-set
Message structure:
Genset Name (hh:mm:ss dd.mm.yyyy)
hh:mm:ss Load on Genset

Alarm SMS
The InteliLite controller equipped with the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication module is able to send
Alarm SMS according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 329)
BOC Message (page 329)
Sd Messages (page 330)

Note: Firstly setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 322) has to be adjusted.

Message structure:
Gen-set Name
AL=(Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Alarm x)

Note: Asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and exclamation mark means that alarm is active.

SMS commands
To control the gen-set equipped with InteliLite controller and CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication module
(or modem) via SMS requests, send an SMS in the structure of:
# xxxx, yyyy, zzzz, etc.
SMS send to the telephone number of the SIM card in your CM-GPRS module (or modem). Where the “#” mark
means the controller access code, “xxxx” means the Command 1, “yyyy” is Command 2, “zzzz” is Command 3,
etc.
Note: Access code is set up via LiteEdit2015.

IMPORTANT: If wrong controller access code is set, then only help command is working.

InteliLite Global Guide 122

 start Start the engine in MAN mode.
stop Stop the engine in MAN mode.
fault reset Acknowledging alarms and deactivating the horn output.
gcb close Closing GCB in MAN and TEST mode.
gcb open Opening GCB in MAN and TEST mode.
off Switching to OFF mode.
man Switching to MAN mode.
auto Switching to AUTO mode.
status Get status information from controller unit.
help Get a list of available SMS requests.

Note: Between commands are internal delays adjusted due to system requirements.

Example: When the controller, in AUTO mode, with a controller name of “InteliLite-Test”, with the CM-
GPRS module and access code “0” receives the SMS:
0 man, start, gcb close, gcb open, stop, auto
Controller mode will be changed to MANUAL mode. The engine will be started and GCB will close. Then
GCB will open, the engine will stop and it will go into AUTO mode again.
The controller will send back the SMS (controller will respond to SMS after every command has been
finished, not sooner.):
#InteliLite-Test: <OK>,<OK>,<OK>, <OK>,<OK>, <OK>
The value <OK> or <ERROR> means if the command has been performed succesfuly or not.

Emails

Event Email
The InteliLite controller equipped with the CM-Ethernet communication module is able to send Event Email
according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 329)

Note: Firstly setpoints Email Address 1 (page 326) and SMTP Sender Address (page 320) (for CM-GPRS) or
SMTP Sender Address (page 331) (for CM-Ethernet) have to be adjusted.

Note: Summer Time Mode (page 263) and Time Zone (page 328) have to be adjusted for correct time in emails.

Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss

InteliLite Global Guide 123

 Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3

Events
-----------------------------------------------
hh:mm:ss Event 1
hh:mm:ss Event 2
hh:mm:ss Event 3

Alarm Email
The InteliLite controller equipped with the CM-Ethernet communication module is able to send Alarm Emails
according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 329)
BOC Message (page 329)
Sd Messages (page 330)

Note: Firstly setpoints Email Address 1 (page 326) and SMTP Sender Address (page 320) (for CM-GPRS) or
SMTP Sender Address (page 331) (for CM-Ethernet) have to be adjusted.

Note: Summer Time Mode (page 263) and Time Zone (page 328) have to be adjusted for correct time in emails.

Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss

InteliLite Global Guide 124

 Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3

History events
-----------------------------------------------
0 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 1
-1 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 2
-2 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 3
Note: Asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and exclamation mark means that alarm is active.

InteliLite Global Guide 125

 Web Server
IMPORTANT: The web interface is based on HTTP protocol and is intended to be used only in
private networks. It is not recommended to expose the web interface to the public Internet.

The Web Server is designed for basic monitoring and adjustment of the controller using a web browser. Just put
the controller IP address into the browser to display the main controller web page like http://192.168.1.254. You
will be asked for the controller access code prior to entering the web pages.
IMPORTANT: Do not use the browser navigation buttons as "Back", "Forward" or "Reload". Use
the links and the reload button located in the toolbar instead.

Note: Only two remote clients can be connected to the Web Server at one moment. If you close your web
browser without disconnecting from the CM-Ethernet ("Exit" button at the web pages), the connection will be
blocked for next 5 minutes.

Image 6.7 Web Server main screen

InteliLite Global Guide 126

 Scada
Click to the SCADA link in the toolbar to display the scada page. The scada page is also the main page which is
displayed by default if you just put the CM-Ethernet address into the browser (after entering the right access
code).

Image 6.8 Web Server - Scada screen

InteliLite Global Guide 127

 Measurement
Click to the MEASUREMENT link in the toolbar to display the measurement page. Then click to the required
group name in the left box to display values of the group in the right box.
Note: The measurement page is automatically refreshed every 60 seconds (this time cannot be changed).

Image 6.9 Web Server - measurement screen

InteliLite Global Guide 128

 Setpoints
Click to the SETPOINTS link in the toolbar to display the setpoints page.
Click to the required group name in the left box to display setpoints of the group in the right box.
Click to the required setpoint name or value to change the value. If the respective setpoint is protected by
password, which is indicated by a lock icon by the setpoint name, you have to click on the "Controller
password" icon located in the toolbar and then enter valid password.

Image 6.10 Web Server - Setpoints screen

InteliLite Global Guide 129

 History
Click to the HISTORY link in the toolbar to display the history page.
Use the control buttons to move within the history file.
Note: The history page is automatically refreshed every 60 seconds. If a new record appears in the controller,
the web page will not show it immediately as e.g. LiteEdit2015.

Image 6.11 Web Server - History screen

InteliLite Global Guide 130

 Web Server Adjustment
Click to the "Web Server settings" icon in the toolbar to display the settings page.
Select the controller language the web pages will appear in.
Select the rate of automatic refresh of the scada page.

Image 6.12 Web Server - Adjustment screen

6 back to Communication

6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems

6.2.1 SNMP 131
6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 133

6 back to Communication

6.2.1 SNMP
SNMP is an UDP-based client-server protocol used for providing data and events into a supervisory system
(building management system). The controller plays the role of a „SNMP Agent“ while the supervisory system
plays the role of a „SNMP Manager“.
CM-Ethernet module is required for SNMP function
Supported versions - SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c
The SNMP Agent function is to be enabled by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page 335) in the CM-Ethernet setpoint
group. The setpoints SNMP RD Community String (page 335) and SNMP WR Community String (page 336) in the

InteliLite Global Guide 131

 same group can be used to customize the „community strings“ for the read and write operations which have
function like „passwords“. All requests sent from the SNMP Manager have to contain community string which
match with the community string adjusted in the controller otherwise the controller refuses the operation.

MIB table
The „MIB table“  (Management Information Base) is a table which gives to the Manager description of all objects
provided by the Agent.
The MIB table is specific for each controller type and configuration
The MIB table is to be exported from the controller configuration using LiteEdit2015
Controllers with identical firmware and configuration share also identical MIB table, however if the
configuration and/or firmware is not identical the MIB table is different and must be exported separately for
each controller.
The root node of the MIB table of InteliLite controller is enterprises.comapProjekt.il, which is
1.3.6.1.4.1.28634.14. Under this node there are following sub-nodes :
notifications group (SMI v2 only) contains definitions of all notification-type objects that the Agent may send
to the Manager.
groupRdFix contains read-only objects that exist in all controller regardless of the firmware version/type and
configuration.
groupRdCfg contains read-only objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
groupWrFix contains read-write objects that exist in all controller regardless of the firmware version/type and
configuration.
groupWrCfg contains read-write objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
groupW contains write-only objects.
notificationData group contains objects that are accessible only as bindings of the notification messages.

SMI version
In LiteEdit the MIB table may be exported in two different formats – SMI v1 and SMI v2. The format which shall
be used for export depends on the SNMP Manager and SMI version that it does support.
Typically, SMI v1 is used for SNMP v1 and vice versa, but it is not a rule and SMI v2 may be also used for
SNMP v1.

SNMP reserved objects

Name OID Access Data type Meaning

Writing: command argument
pfActionArgument groupWrFix.24550 read,write Gauge32
Reading: command return value
pfActionCommand groupW.24551 write Integer32 Command code 1)
pfPassword groupW.24524 write Integer32 Password

1) For list of commands, arguments and description of the procedure of invoking commands see the description
of the MODBUS protocol.

InteliLite Global Guide 132

 SNMP notifications
Except the request-response communication model, in which the communication is controlled by the Manager,
there are also messages that the Agent sends without any requests. These messages are called „Notifications“ 
and inform the Manager about significant events occurred in the Agent.
The controller can send notifications to two different SNMP Managers (two different IP addresses). The
addresses are to be adjusted in the CM-Ethernet setpoint group by the setpoints SNMP Traps IP Address 1 (page
336) and SNMP Traps IP Address 2 (page 336). If the Manager address is not adjusted the particular notification
channel is off. The controller will send the notifications in format adjusted by the setpoint SNMP Trap Format.
Each notification (kind of event) is identified by an unique identifier (Trap ID in SNMPv1 or Notification OID
in SNMPv2). This unique identifier gives the specific meaning to the notification message, e.g. Protection 1.
level - Fuel Level - alarm activated.
All possible notifications and their identifiers are listed in the MIB table.
The notification message also contains controller name, serial number and textual description of the event.

6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP

MODBUS protocol is used for integration of the controller into a building management system
or for remote monitoring via 3rd party monitoring tools.
MODBUS-RTU can be used on serial interfaces (CM-RS232-485 module is required). The MODBUS-RTU
server must be activated by switching the setpoint COM1 Mode (page 300) or COM2 Mode (page 301) into
the Modbus position. The serial speed for MODBUS-RTU communication is to be adjusted by the setpoint
COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed (page 301) or COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed (page 302).
MODBUS/TCP can be used on the ethernet interface (CM-Ethernet module is required). Up to 2 clients can
be connected simultaneously. The MODBUS/TCP server must be activated by the setpoint MODBUS Server
(page 335).
MODBUS, MODBUS/TCP protocol can be used simultaneously with Web connection and direct
ethernet/AirGate connection.
The MODBUS, MODBUS/TCP protocol is enabled alternatively with the SNMP protocol, so both protocols can
not be active simultaneously.

Addres space
The object address space is separated into several areas as described in the table below. The actual mapping of
specific controller data objects to specific MODBUS addresses, which depends on configuration, can be
exported into a text file from the appropriate controller archive using LiteEdit2015. There are several special
registers with fixed meaning (reserved registers) which are listed in a separate table in this chapter.

MODBUS MODICON object

Meaning Access MODBUS function
address type
Read: 01, 02
0000 .. 0999 Binary objects Read only Discrete Inputs

Input Registers
1000 .. 2999 Values Read only Read: 03, 04

InteliLite Global Guide 133

 Read: 03, 04
3000 .. 3999 Setpoints Read/Write Holding Registers
Write: 06, 16
Reserved Read/Write, depends on Input Registers Read: 03, 04
4200 .. 7167
registers each specific register Holding Registers Write: 06, 16

Mapping data types to registers

As there are multiple data types in the controller but only one data type in MODBUS (the register, which is 2
byte long), a mapping table is necessary to compose and decompose the MODBUS messages correctly.

Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB  = sign extension
Integer8 1-byte signed integer 1
LSB  = value
MSB  = 0
Unsigned8  1-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB  = value
MSB  = value, MSB
Integer16  2-byte signed integer 1
LSB  = value, LSB
MSB  = value, MSB
Unsigned16 2-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB  = value, LSB
MSB1  = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1  = value, byte 2
Integer32  4-byte signed integer 2
MSB2  = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB1  = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
Unsigned32  4-byte unsigned integer 2
MSB2  = value, byte 1
LSB2  = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB  = 0
Binary8 8-bit binary value 1
LSB  = value, bits 0-7
MSB  = value, bits 8-15
Binary16  16-bit binary value 1
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB1 = value, bits 24-31
LSB1 = value, bits 16-23
Binary32 32-bit binary value 2
MSB2 = value, bits 8-15
LSB2 = value, bits 0-7
MSB = 0
Char 1-byte ASCII character 1
LSB = ASCII value of the character
MSB = 0
StrList Index into a list of strings 1
LSB = index into the list
ShortStr Zero-terminated string of 8 MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character

InteliLite Global Guide 134

 Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 15 ASCII characters.
LSB2 = ASCII value of the 4. character
…
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
LongStr 16 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 31 ASCII characters.
LSB2 = ASCII value of the 4. character
…
MSB1 = BCD (dd)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Date Date (dd-mm-yy) 2
MSB2 = BCD (yy)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = BCD (hh)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Time Time (hh-mm-ss) 2
MSB2 = BCD (ss)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = reserved for future use
LSB1 = reserved for future use
MSB2 = Alarm level *)
LSB2 = Alarm status **)
Alarm An item of the Alarmlist 27 MSB3 = alarm string ***)
LSB3 = alarm string
MSB4 = alarm string
LSB5 = alarm string
…

*) 1 .. level 1 (yellow), 2 .. level 2 (red), 3 .. sensor fail

**) Bit0 – alarm is active, Bit1 – alarm is confirmed
***) String encoding is UTF-8

Error codes (exception codes)

Exception code is returned by the controller (server) if the query sent from the client could not be completed
successfuly.
The controller responds with the error codes in as follows:
01 – Ilegal function is returned if an incompatible type of operation is applied for a specific object, e.g. if
function 03 is applied to a binary object.

InteliLite Global Guide 135

 02 – illegal address is returned if the client tries to perform an operation with a object address that is not
related to any existing object or that is located inside an object which is composed by multiple addresses
(registers).
04 – device error is returned in all other errorneous situations. More detailed specification of the problem can
be consequently obtained by reading the registers 4205 – 4206

Reserved registers
There are several registers with specific meaning. These registers are available in all controllers regardless of
the configuration.

Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
4200 - 4201 2 read/write Time RTC Time in BCD code
4202 - 4203 2 read/write Date RTC Date in BCD code
Index of the language that is used for text
4204 1 read/write Unsigned8 data provided by MODBUS (e.g. alarmlist
messages).
Last application error. To be read after the
4205 - 4206 2 read Unsigned32 device returns the exception code 04. It
contains specific information about the error.
Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
Reading: command return value
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code
4010 1 - - Not implemented
4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password
4212 - 4213 2 read Unsigned32 Communication status
4214 1 read Unsigned8 Number of items in the Alarmlist
4215 - 4241 27 read Alarm 1. record in alarm list
4242 - 4268 27 read Alarm 2. record in alarm list
4269 - 4295 27 read Alarm 3. record in alarm list
4296 - 4322 27 read Alarm 4. record in alarm list
4323 - 4349 27 read Alarm 5. record in alarm list
4350 - 4376 27 read Alarm 6. record in alarm list
4377 - 4403 27 read Alarm 7. record in alarm list
4404 - 4430 27 read Alarm 8. record in alarm list
4431 - 4457 27 read Alarm 9. record in alarm list
4458 - 4484 27 read Alarm 10. record in alarm list
4485 - 4511 27 read Alarm 11. record in alarm list
4512 - 4538 27 read Alarm 12. record in alarm list
4539 - 4565 27 read Alarm 13. record in alarm list

InteliLite Global Guide 136

 Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
4566 - 4592 27 read Alarm 14. record in alarm list
4593 - 4619 27 read Alarm 15. record in alarm list
4620 - 4646 27 read Alarm 16. record in alarm list

List of commands and arguments

"Commands" are used to invoke a specific action in the controller via the communication channel. The list of
available actions is in the table below. The general procedure of writing a command via MODBUS is as follows:
1. (Optional) Write required level of password into the register 44212 (register address 4211). Use function 6. If
the password is required or not depends on configuration of access rules. It can be adjusted/modified by
LiteEdit2015.
2. Write the command argument into the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208). Use function
16.
3. Write the command code into the register 44210 (register address 4209). Use function 6.
4. (Optional) Read the command return value from the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208).
Use function 3.
5. If the command was executed the return value is as listed in the table. If the command was accepted but
there was an error during execution the return value indicates the reason:
a. 0x00000001 – invalid argument
b. 0x00000002 – command refused (e.g. controller not in MAN, breaker can not be closed in the specific
situation etc.)

Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start *) 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop *) 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE
Fault reset *) 0x01 0x08F70000 0x000008F8
Horn reset *) 0x01 0x04FB0000 0x000004FC
GCB toggle *) 0x02 0x11EE0000 0x000011EF
GCB on 0x02 0x11EF0000 0x000011F0
GCB off 0x02 0x11F00000 0x000011F1
MCB toggle *) 0x02 0x12ED0000 0x000012EE
MCB on 0x02 0x12EE0000 0x000012EF
MCB off 0x02 0x12EF0000 0x000012F0

*) This action is an equivalent of pressing the front panel button

InteliLite Global Guide 137

 MODBUS examples
Modbus RTU examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Export table of values from LiteEdit

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 1D 00 01 15 3C
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
041Dhex = 1053dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 F0 B8 00
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
02hex = 2 bytes read 00F0hex = 240dec

We read value 240 from register 01053. From table of modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.
Reading Nominal power
Export table of values from LiteEdit

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
01228 9018 Nominal Power kW Integer 2 0 0 32767 Generator

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 CC 00 01 45 05
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
04CChex = 1228dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 C8 B9 D2
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
02hex = 2 bytes read 00C8hex = 200dec

Read nominal power is 200 kW.

InteliLite Global Guide 138

 Reading all binary inputs as modbus register

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Binary
01068 8235 Binary#2 2 0 - - Controller I/O
Inputs

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 2C 00 01 44 F3
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
042Chex = 1068dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 12 38 49
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
02hex = 2 bytes read 0012hex = 00010010bin

Binary inputs is 00010010. It means Binary input 2 and binary input 5 are active.
Note: You can use modbus function 4 insted of 3, rest of data remain same (CRC differs).

InteliLite Global Guide 139

 Reading binary inputs as coil status.

Table: Binaries
Allowed MODBUS functions: 01, 02
Addresses Source
C.O.# Name of Value Bit Name
Modbus Addr. = Value Bit # Group
State # Name of State Activated by protection(s):
Prot. Addr. = State
00000 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 1 GCB Feedback Controller I/O
00001 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 2 MCB Feedback Controller I/O
00002 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 3 Emergency Stop Controller I/O

We will read state of MCB Feedback binary input.

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 01 00 01 00 01 AC 0A
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
0001hex = 0001dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 01 01 01 90 48
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
01hex = 1 byte read 01hex = active

The readed data is 01, it means this binary input is active.

Note: You can use modbus function 2 insted of 1, rest of data remains same (CRC differs).

InteliLite Global Guide 140

 Starting the engine
Before starting engine you may need to write password. Depends on your settings in controller.
Table Reserved registers (page 136)

Register addresses Number of registers Access Data type Meaning

Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
Reading: command return value
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code

Table List of commands and arguments (page 137)

Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE

Request 1/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 10 10 6F 00 03 06
Modbus function Register address
Controller address Number of registers Data length in bytes
10hex = 16dec 106Fhex = 4207dec

Request 2/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 FE 00 00 00 01 68 0B
Argument Command code CRC

Note: Command and argument may be written as one "packet" (function 16) or you can split it and write
argument (function 16) and after that write command code (function 6).

InteliLite Global Guide 141

 Password
This password is the same as in LiteEdit or directly in controller.
Table Reserved registers (page 136)

Register addresses Number of registers Access Data type Meaning

4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password

Note: Default password is "0".

In this example the password is "1234".

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 10 73 04 D2 7C D1
Register address Password
Controller address Modbus function CRC
1073hex = 4211dec 04D2hex = 1234dec

Response for success: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 10 73 00 00 7C D1
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero. CRC
1073hex = 4211dec

Response for bad password: (Numbers in Hex)

01 86 04 43 A3
Controller Modbus exception 04 – device error
CRC
address for function 6. see Error codes (exception codes) on page 135

InteliLite Global Guide 142

 Nominal Power – writing

Table: Setpoints
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04, 06, 16
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Nominal Basic
03008 8276 kW Unsigned 2 0 1 5000
Power Settings

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 0B C0 00 64 8A 39
Register address Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec 0064hex = 100dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 0B C0 00 00 8B D2
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec

Writen setpoint nominal power is 100 kW.

CRC calculation
The check field allows the receiver to check the validity of the message. The check field value is the Cyclical
Redundancy Check (CRC) based on the polynomial x16+x15+x2+1. CRC is counted from all message bytes
preceding the check field.
Online CRC calculator: http://www.lammertbies.nl/comm/info/crc-calculation.html Use CRC-16 (Modbus)
Write LSB first.
For writing nominal power 100 kW the CRC is calculated from this data: 01060BC00064hex

InteliLite Global Guide 143

 Modbus TCP examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Export table of values from LiteEdit

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 04 1D 00 01
transaction protocol Length of
Controller Modbus Register address Number of
identifier identifier data bytes
address function 041Dhex = 1053dec registers
(usually 0) (usually 0) following

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 04 1D 00 01
transaction protocol Length of
Controller Modbus Register address Number of
identifier identifier data bytes
address function 041Dhex = 1053dec registers
(usually 0) (usually 0) following

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

00 00 00 00 00 05 01 03 02 00 F0
transaction protocol Length of Length of data
Controller Modbus Data
identifier identifier data bytes 02hex = 2 bytes
address function 00F0hex = 240dec
(usually 0) (usually 0) following read

We read value 240 from register 01053. From table of modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.
6 back to Connection to 3rd party systems

InteliLite Global Guide 144

7 Technical data
Power supply Binary inputs
Power supply range 8-36 VDC Number 7, non-isolated
394 mA / 8 VDC 0-2 VDC close contact
Close/Open indication
255 mA / 12 VDC >6 VDC open contact
Power consumption
140 mA / 24 VDC
Binary outputs
97 mA / 36 VDC
Replaceable 2 high current output, non-isolated
RTC battery Number
5 low current output, non-isolated
2 A (without BOUT
Fusing consumption nor Max. 10 A for 10 s, 4 A long term
extension modules) current 0,5 A

Max. Power Dissipation 3,5W Switching

positive supply terminal
to
Operating conditions
Analog inputs
Operating
-20 ˚C to +70 ˚ C
temperature Number 4 non-isolated

Operating Type Resistive

temperature for LT -40 ˚C to +70 ˚ C Resolution 0,1 Ω
version
Range 0-2500 Ω
Storage temperature -30 ˚C to +70 ˚ C
Input impedance 800 Ω
Operating humidity 95 % w/o condensation
±2 % from range in range
5-25 Hz, ± 1,6 mm Accuracy 0-2500 Ω
Vibration
25-100 Hz, a = 4 g ±1,5 kΩ in range 2,5-15 kΩ
Shocks a = 500 m/s2
Magnetic pick-up
Surrounding air temperature rating 70°C.
4 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in
Suitable for pollution degree 3.
range 4 Hz to 1 kHz
Voltage measurement Voltage input range
6 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in
range 1 kHz to 5 kHz
Measurement inputs 3ph-n Gen voltage
10 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in
Measurement range 277 V
range 5 kHz to 10 kHz
Max. allowed voltage 350 V
Frequency input
4 Hz to 10 kHz
Accuracy 1% range
Frequency range 40-70 Hz (accuracy 0.1 Hz) Frequency
0,72 MΩ ph-ph measurement 0,2 % from range 10 kHz
Input impedance tolerance
0,36 MΩ ph-n

Current measurement Communications

Measurement USB port Non-isolated
3ph Gen current
inputs CAN bus, 250 kbps, max 200 m, 120 Ω
CAN 1 termination option
Measurement
5A
range non- isolated

Max. allowed
10 A
current
1,5 % for full temperature range (1 %
Accuracy
from 0 ˚C to 50 ˚C)

Input impedance < 0,1 Ω

InteliLite Global Guide 145

 Certificates and standards EN
61000-
6-2

EN
61000-
6-4

EN
61010-
1

EN
61000-
2-1 (-
20
°C/16
h for
std, -
40
°C/16
h for
LT
versio
n)

EN
61000-
2-2 (70
°C/16
h)

EN
61000-
2-6
(2÷25
Hz /
±1,6
mm;
25÷10
0 Hz /
4,0 g)

EN
61000-
2-27
(a=500
m/s2;
T=6
ms)

EN
61000-
2-30

EN
60529
(front
panel
IP65,
back
side
IP20)

6 back to Table of contents

InteliLite Global Guide 146

8 Appendix
8.1 Controller objects 148
8.2 Alarms 559
8.3 Modules 601

6 back to Table of contents

InteliLite Global Guide 147

8.1 Controller objects
8.1.1 Setpoints 149
8.1.2 Values 404
8.1.3 Logical binary inputs 448
8.1.4 Logical binary outputs 462
8.1.5 Logical analog inputs 514
8.1.6 PLC 546

InteliLite Global Guide 148

8.1.1 Setpoints
What setpoints are:
Setpoints are analog, binary or special data objects which are used for adjusting the controller to the specific
environment. Setpoints are organized into groups according to their meaning. Setpoints can be adjusted from
the controller front panel, PC, MODBUS, etc.
All setpoints can be protected by a password against unauthorized changes. Password protection can be
assigned to the setpoints during the configuration procedure. See the chapter Password (page 66) in Operator
guide for instructions on how to enter and modify a password.

List of setpoint groups

Group: Basic settings 155
Group: Engine settings 164
Group: Generator settings 194
Group: General Analog Inputs 202
Group: Scheduler 262
Group: Geo-Fencing 283
Group: Plug-In Modules 287
Group: Sensors Spec 288
Group: Alternate Config 290
Group: CM-RS232-485 300
Group: CM-GPRS 302
Group: CM-4G-GPS 314
Group: CM-Ethernet 326
Group: EM-BIO8-EFCP 338
Group: PLC 340

For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of setpoints (page 150).

InteliLite Global Guide 149

 List of setpoints

Basic settings Protect Hold Off 172 Fuel Tank Volume 185

Gen-Set Name 155 Sd Ventilation Time 173 Maximal Fuel Drop 185

Nominal Power Split Cooling Speed 173 Maximal Fuel Drop Delay 186
Phase 155 Cooling Time 174 Fuel Pump On 186
Nominal Power 156 Stop Time 174 Fuel Pump Off 187
Nominal Current 156 After Cooling Time 175 Transfer Wrn Delay 188
CT Ratio 157 Overspeed Sd 175 Maintenance Timer 1 188
Connection type 157 Overspeed Overshot 176 Maintenance Timer 2 189
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 158 Overspeed Overshot Maintenance Timer 3 189
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 159 Period 176 Battery Charge Fail Delay 189
PT Ratio 159 Oil Pressure Wrn 177 Battery < Voltage 190
Nominal Frequency 159 Oil Pressure Sd 177 Battery > Voltage 190
Gear Teeth 160 Oil Pressure Delay 177 Battery <> Voltage Delay 190
Nominal RPM 160 ECU Oil Pressure Wrn 178 Power Switch On 190
Controller mode 161 ECU Oil Pressure Sd 178 Power Switch Off 192
Controller Address 161 ECU Oil Pressure Delay 178 ECU Frequency Select 193
Reset To Manual 162 Coolant Temperature Wrn 179 ECU Speed Adjustment 193
Backlight Timeout 162 Coolant Temperature Sd 179

Horn Timeout 163 Coolant Temperature Generator settings

Delay 179 Overload BOC 194
Zero Power Mode 163
ECU Coolant Temperature Overload Wrn 194
Main Screen 164
Wrn 180
Overload BOC Delay 194
ECU Coolant Temperature
Engine settings Short Circuit BOC 195
Sd 180
Fuel Solenoid 164 Short Circuit BOC Delay 195
ECU Coolant Temperature
Cranking Attempts 165 Delay 180 IDMT Overcurrent Delay 196
Maximum Cranking Time 165 Temperature Switch On 181 Current Unbalance BOC 197
Cranking Fail Pause 165 Temperature Switch Off 182 Current Unbalance BOC
Prestart Time 166 Delay 197
Coolant Temperature Low
Starting RPM 166 Wrn 182 Generator > Voltage Sd 198

Starting Oil Pressure 167 Coolant Temperature Low Generator > Voltage Wrn 198

D+ Function 167 Delay 183 Generator < Voltage BOC 199

Glow Plugs Time 168 Fuel Level Wrn 183 Generator < Voltage Wrn 199

Fuel Solenoid Lead 169 Fuel Level Sd 183 Generator <> Voltage
Fuel Level Delay 184 Delay 200
Idle Time 169
ECU Fuel Level Wrn 184 Voltage Unbalance BOC 200
Minimal Stabilization Time 171
ECU Fuel Level Sd 184 Voltage Unbalance BOC
Maximal Stabilization
Delay 200
Time 172 ECU Fuel Level Delay 185
Generator > Frequency 201

InteliLite Global Guide 150

 BOC Analog Switch 6 Off 220 Analog Protection 14 Wrn 241
Generator > Frequency Analog Protection 7 Wrn 220 Analog Protection 14 Sd 242
Wrn 201 Analog Protection 7 Sd 221 Analog Protection 14
Generator < Frequency Analog Protection 7 Delay 221 Delay 242
BOC 201 Analog Switch 14 On 243
Analog Switch 7 On 222
Generator < Frequency Analog Switch 14 Off 244
Analog Switch 7 Off 223
Wrn 202
Analog Protection 8 Wrn 223 Analog Protection 15 Wrn 244
Generator <> Frequency
Analog Protection 8 Sd 224 Analog Protection 15 Sd 245
BOC Delay 202
Analog Protection 8 Delay 224 Analog Protection 15
Delay 245
General Analog Inputs Analog Switch 8 On 225
Analog Switch 15 On 246
Analog Protection 1 Wrn 202 Analog Switch 8 Off 226
Analog Switch 15 Off 247
Analog Protection 1 Sd 203 Analog Protection 9 Wrn 226
Analog Protection 16 Wrn 247
Analog Protection 1 Delay 203 Analog Protection 9 Sd 227
Analog Protection 16 Sd 248
Analog Switch 1 On 204 Analog Protection 9 Delay 227
Analog Protection 16
Analog Switch 1 Off 205 Analog Switch 9 On 228
Delay 248
Analog Protection 2 Wrn 205 Analog Switch 9 Off 229
Analog Switch 16 On 249
Analog Protection 2 Sd 206 Analog Protection 10 Wrn 229
Analog Switch 16 Off 250
Analog Protection 2 Delay 206 Analog Protection 10 Sd 230
Analog Protection 17 Wrn 250
Analog Switch 2 On 207 Analog Protection 10
Analog Protection 17 Sd 251
Delay 230
Analog Switch 2 Off 208 Analog Protection 17
Analog Switch 10 On 231
Analog Protection 3 Wrn 208 Delay 251
Analog Switch 10 Off 232
Analog Protection 3 Sd 209 Analog Switch 17 On 252
Analog Protection 11 Wrn 232
Analog Protection 3 Delay 209 Analog Switch 17 Off 253
Analog Protection 11 Sd 233
Analog Switch 3 On 210 Analog Protection 18 Wrn 253
Analog Protection 11
Analog Switch 3 Off 211 Analog Protection 18 Sd 254
Delay 233
Analog Protection 4 Wrn 211 Analog Protection 18
Analog Switch 11 On 234
Analog Protection 4 Sd 212 Delay 254
Analog Switch 11 Off 235
Analog Protection 4 Delay 212 Analog Switch 18 On 255
Analog Protection 12 Wrn 235
Analog Switch 4 On 213 Analog Switch 18 Off 256
Analog Protection 12 Sd 236
Analog Switch 4 Off 214 Analog Protection 19 Wrn 256
Analog Protection 12
Analog Protection 5 Wrn 214 Analog Protection 19 Sd 257
Delay 236
Analog Protection 5 Sd 215 Analog Protection 19
Analog Switch 12 On 237
Analog Protection 5 Delay 215 Delay 257
Analog Switch 12 Off 238
Analog Switch 5 On 216 Analog Switch 19 On 258
Analog Protection 13 Wrn 238
Analog Switch 5 Off 217 Analog Switch 19 Off 259
Analog Protection 13 Sd 239
Analog Protection 6 Wrn 217 Analog Protection 20 Wrn 259
Analog Protection 13
Analog Protection 6 Sd 218 Analog Protection 20 Sd 260
Delay 239
Analog Protection 6 Delay 218 Analog Protection 20
Analog Switch 13 On 240
Delay 260
Analog Switch 6 On 219 Analog Switch 13 Off 241
Analog Switch 20 On 261

InteliLite Global Guide 151

 Analog Switch 20 Off 262 Rental Timer 1 278 ECU Speed Adjustment 3 299
Rental Timer 1 Wrn 280
Scheduler Rental Timer 2 280 Communication
Time 262 Rental Timer 2 Wrn 282 Modules
Date 263 Rental Timer BOC 282 COM1 Mode 300
Time Stamp Period 263 COM1 Communication
Summer Time Mode 263 Plug-In Modules Speed 300

Timer 1 Function 264 Slot A 287 COM1 MODBUS

Communication Speed 301
Timer Setup 265 Slot B 288
COM2 Mode 301
Timer 1 Repetition 265
Sensors Spec COM2 Communication
Timer 1 First Occur. Date 266
Speed 301
Timer 1 First Occur. Time 266 Analog Input 1 Calibration 288
COM2 MODBUS
Timer 1 Duration 266 Analog Input 2 Calibration 289
Communication Speed 302
Timer 1 Repeated 267 Analog Input 3 Calibration 289
Mode 302
Timer 1 Refresh Period 268 Analog Input 4 Calibration 290
APN Name 303
Timer 1 Weekends 269
APN User Name 303
Timer 1 Day 269 Alternate Config
APN User Password 303
Timer 1 Repeat Day 270 Connection Type 1 290
Email Address 1 304
Timer 1 Repeated Day In Nominal Current 1 291
Email Address 2 304
Week 270 Nominal Frequency 1 291
Email Address 3 305
Timer 1 Repeat Day In Nominal RPM 1 291
Email Address 4 305
Month 270 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 292
Email/SMS Language 306
Timer 1 Repeat Week In Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 292
Month 271 SMTP User Name 306
Connection type 2 293
Timer 2 Function 271 SMTP User Password 307
Nominal Current 2 293
Timer Setup 272 SMTP Server Address 307
Nominal Frequency 2 293
Timer 2 Repetition 272 SMTP Sender Address 308
Nominal RPM 2 294
Timer 2 First Occur. Date 273 Time Zone 308
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 294
Timer 2 Start Time 273 Event Message 309
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 294
Timer 2 Duration 273 Wrn Message 309
Connection type 3 295
Timer 2 Repeated 274 BOC Message 309
Nominal Current 3 295
Timer 2 Refresh Period 275 Sd Messages 310
Nominal Frequency 3 295
Timer 2 Weekends 276 Telephone Number 1 310
Nominal RPM 3 296
Timer 2 Day 276 Telephone Number 2 311
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 296
Timer 2 Repeat Day 277 Telephone Number 3 311
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 296
Timer 2 Repeated Day In Telephone Number 4 312
ECU Frequency Select 1 297
Week 277 DNS IP Address 312
ECU Speed Adjustment 1 297
Timer 2 Repeat Day In AirGate Connection 313
ECU Frequency Select 2 298
Month 277 AirGate Address 313
ECU Speed Adjustment 2 298
Timer 2 Repeat Week In ComAp TCP Port 314
Month 278 ECU Frequency Select 3 299

InteliLite Global Guide 152

 Mode 314 IP Address 332 PLC Setpoint 15 354
APN Name 315 Subnet Mask 333 PLC Setpoint 16 355
APN User Name 315 Gateway IP 333 PLC Setpoint 17 356
APN User Password 315 DNS IP Address 1 334 PLC Setpoint 18 357
Email Address 1 316 DNS IP Address 2 334 PLC Setpoint 19 358
Email Address 2 316 MODBUS Server 335 PLC Setpoint 20 359
Email Address 3 317 SNMP Agent 335 PLC Setpoint 21 360
Email Address 4 317 SNMP RD Community PLC Setpoint 22 361
Email/SMS Language 318 String 335 PLC Setpoint 23 362
SMTP User Name 318 SNMP WR Community PLC Setpoint 24 363
String 336
SMTP User Password 319 PLC Setpoint 25 364
SNMP Traps IP Address 1336
SMTP Server Address 319 PLC Setpoint 26 365
SNMP Traps IP Address 2336
SMTP Sender Address 320 PLC Setpoint 27 366
AirGate Connection 337
Time Zone 320 PLC Setpoint 28 367
AirGate Address 337
Event Message 321 PLC Setpoint 29 368
ComAp TCP Port 338
Wrn Message 321 PLC Setpoint 30 369
BOC Message 321 PLC Setpoint 31 370
Extension Modules
Sd Messages 322 PLC Setpoint 32 371
Earth Fault Current
Telephone Number 1 322 PLC Setpoint 33 372
Protection 338
Telephone Number 2 323 PLC Setpoint 34 373
Earth Fault Delay 339
Telephone Number 3 323 PLC Setpoint 35 374
Earth Fault CT Input
Telephone Number 4 324 Range 339 PLC Setpoint 36 375
AirGate Connection 324 Earth Fault CT Ratio 339 PLC Setpoint 37 376
AirGate Address 325 Earth Fault Sd 340 PLC Setpoint 38 377
ComAp TCP Port 325 PLC Setpoint 39 378
Email Address 1 326 PLC PLC Setpoint 40 379
Email Address 2 326 PLC Setpoint 1 340 PLC Setpoint 41 380
Email Address 3 327 PLC Setpoint 2 341 PLC Setpoint 42 381
Email Address 4 327 PLC Setpoint 3 342 PLC Setpoint 43 382
Email/SMS Language 328 PLC Setpoint 4 343 PLC Setpoint 44 383
Time Zone 328 PLC Setpoint 5 344 PLC Setpoint 45 384
Event Message 329 PLC Setpoint 6 345 PLC Setpoint 46 385
Wrn Message 329 PLC Setpoint 7 346 PLC Setpoint 47 386
BOC Message 329 PLC Setpoint 8 347 PLC Setpoint 48 387
Sd Messages 330 PLC Setpoint 9 348 PLC Setpoint 49 388
SMTP User Name 330 PLC Setpoint 10 349 PLC Setpoint 50 389
SMTP User Password 330 PLC Setpoint 11 350 PLC Setpoint 51 390
SMTP Server Address 331 PLC Setpoint 12 351 PLC Setpoint 52 391
SMTP Sender Address 331 PLC Setpoint 13 352 PLC Setpoint 53 392
IP Address Mode 332 PLC Setpoint 14 353 PLC Setpoint 54 393

InteliLite Global Guide 153

 PLC Setpoint 55 394
PLC Setpoint 56 395
PLC Setpoint 57 396
PLC Setpoint 58 397
PLC Setpoint 59 398
PLC Setpoint 60 399
PLC Setpoint 61 400
PLC Setpoint 62 401
PLC Setpoint 63 402
PLC Setpoint 64 403

InteliLite Global Guide 154

 Group: Basic settings
Subgroup: Name

Gen-Set Name
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 15 characters [-]
Default value InteliLite Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8637 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User defined name, used for the controller identification at remote phone or mobile connection. Gen-Set
Name is maximally 15 characters long and can be entered using LiteEdit2015 or from controller’s
configuration menu.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Power settings

Nominal Power Split Phase

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config Yes
Step 1 kW
Comm object 9977 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 157)
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload BOC
(page 194) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 157) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or Splitphase.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 155

 Nominal Power
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config Yes
Step 1 kW
Comm object 8276 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 194) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 157) is adjusted to Monophase or
Splitphase or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects connection type as
3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Current settings

Nominal Current
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 8275 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 157).
Description
It is current limit for generator IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page 196) and Short Circuit BOC (page 195)
protections and means maximal continuous generator current. Nominal Current can be different from
generator rated current value.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Current 1 (page 291)
and Nominal Current 2 (page 293).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 156

 CT Ratio
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [A/5A]
Default value 2 000 A/5A Alternative config NO
Step 1 A/5A
Comm object 8274 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Gen-set current transformers ratio.
Note: Generator currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is below 1% of CT
range.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Voltage settings

Connection type
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Mono Phase / SplitPhase / 3Ph3Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph4Wire / Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 11628 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description

Generator winding connection system

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N
1x CT (Current Transformer)
Split Phase Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection

InteliLite Global Guide 157

 Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)
Autodetect High Leg Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V

3PH3Wire or 3Ph4Wire
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V

Split Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V

Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V

Voltage Autodetect shutdown

Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 290)
and Connection type 2 (page 293).

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-N

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 8277 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 157).
Description
Nominal system (generator) voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 (page
292) and Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page 294).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 158

 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 11657 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 157).
Description
Nominal system (generator) voltage (phase to phase).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 (page
292) and Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page 294).

6 back to List of setpoints

PT Ratio
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,1 .. 500,0 [V/V]
Default value 1,0 V/V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V/V
Comm object 9579 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Generator voltage potential transformers ratio. If no PTs are used, adjust the setpoint to 1.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Frequency settings

Nominal Frequency
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 45 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Comm object 8278 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal system (generator) frequency (usually 50 or 60Hz).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Frequency 1 (page 291)
and Nominal Frequency 2 (page 293).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 159

 Gear Teeth
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] FGen->RPM / 1 .. 500 [-]
Default value 120 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 8252 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Number of teeth on the engine flywheel where the pick-up is installed. Set to zero if no pick-up is used and
the Engine speed will be counted from the generator frequency.
Note: If no pickup is used, the D+ or W terminal should be used to prevent possible overcranking, which
can occur if at least 25% of nominal generator voltage is not present immediately after exceeding firing
speed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal RPM
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 8253 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM - revolutions per minute).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal RPM 1 (page 291) and
Nominal RPM 2 (page 294).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 160

 Subgroup: Controller settings

Controller mode
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST [-]
Default value OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8315 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint can be used for changing the Controller mode remotely, e.g. via MODBUS. Use the mode
selector on the main screen for changing the mode from the front panel. Use mode selector in the control
window for changing the mode from LiteEdit2015.

6 back to List of setpoints

Controller Address
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 32 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 24537 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Controller identification number. It is possible to set controller address different from the default value (1) so
that more IL controllers can be interconnected (via RS485) and accessed e.g. from MODBUS terminal.
Note: When opening connection to the controller it's address has to correspond with the setting in PC
tool.

Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 161

 Reset To Manual
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9983 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
If this function is enabled, the controller will switch automatically to MAN mode when there is a red alarm in
the alarm list and fault reset button is pressed. This is a safety function that prevents the gen-set starting
again automatically in specific cases when fault reset button is pressed.
Example: Controller is in AUTO mode and there is red inactive unconfirmed alarm and fault reset
button is pressed, controller will start automatically.

6 back to List of setpoints

Backlight Timeout
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 255 [min]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 10121 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The display backlight is switched off when this timer exceed. When setpoint is adjusted to disabled then the
display will be backlighted all the time.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 162

 Horn Timeout
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 599 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8264 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Setting of horn behavior.
Disabled Disabling the Horn sounding function
Timeout for HORN (PAGE 502) binary output. The HORN (PAGE 502) output is opened when
1 .. 599 [s]
this timeout elapsed.

Note: Horn timeout starts again from the beginning if a new alarm appears before previous Horn timeout
has elapsed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Zero Power Mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disabled / 1 - 360 [min]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 8548 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The controller is switched to Zero Power Mode when there is no user interaction with the controller for the
preset time period. Zero Power Mode is disabled in AMF automatic mode. For the controller wake up press
button Start or activate Binary Input 1. The controller will not switch to Zero Power Mode if generator is
running. In Zero Power Mode binary outputs go to high impedance.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 163

 Main Screen
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] PwrFactor / ATT [-]
Default value PwrFactor Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13346 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Setpoint adjust value which is shown on main screen.

PwrFactor: Value of power factor is shown on main screen.

This option is for Tier IV Final support. In this case value of DEF Level is shown on main
ATT:
screen.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Engine settings

Subgroup: Starting

Fuel Solenoid
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Diesel / Gas [-]
Default value Diesel Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9100 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Determines behavior of the Binary output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493)
Diesel: Output closes before binary output STARTER (PAGE 510). Lead of output is adjusted via setpoint
Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 169). The output opens if Emergency Stop comes or gen-set is stopped
and in pause between repeated starts.
Gas: Output closes together with binary output IGNITION (PAGE 503) if RPM is over the 30 RPM (fixed
value). Output opens after stop command or in pause between repeated start.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 164

 Cranking Attempts
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 10 [-]
Default value 3 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 8255 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maximal number of cranking attempts.

6 back to List of setpoints

Maximum Cranking Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 255 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8256 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maximum time limit of cranking time.
IMPORTANT: There is a protection against broken pinion on starter. In case that there are no
RPM after 5 seconds of starting, cranking is interrupted and cranking fail pause follows.

6 back to List of setpoints

Cranking Fail Pause

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 5 .. 60 [s]
Default value 8s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8257 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Pause between Cranking Attempts (page 165). PRESTART (PAGE 506) output is active in this pause until
Cranking Fail Pause elapses.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 165

 Prestart Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 2s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8394 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Time of closing of the PRESTART (PAGE 506) output prior to the engine start. Set to zero if you want to leave
the output PRESTART (PAGE 506) open.

Image 8.1 Prestart Time

6 back to List of setpoints

Starting RPM
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 5 .. 50 [%]
Default value 25% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 160)
Comm object 8254 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines the “firing” speed level as percent value of the Nominal RPM (page 160). If this level is
exceeded the engine is considered as started.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 166

 Starting Oil Pressure
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,0 .. 10,0 [bar] / Disabled
Default value 4,5 bar Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 bar
Comm object 9681 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Oil pressure limit for starting. The controller will stop cranking (STARTER (PAGE 510) goes OFF) if the oil
pressure rises above this limit.
Adjust this setpoint to Disabled to disable starting oil pressure condition.
IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

D+ Function
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Enabled / ChargeFail / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9683 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Behavior of D+ terminal.

Enabled The D+ terminal is used for both functions – “running engine” detection and charge fail
detection.
ChargeFail The D+ terminal is used for charge fail detection only
Disabled The D+ terminal is not used.

InteliLite Global Guide 167

 Image 8.2 D+ Function 1

Image 8.3 D+ Function 2

6 back to List of setpoints

Glow Plugs Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. Prestart Time (page 166) [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14412 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines the time before starting when logical binary output GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 500) will be
close.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 168

 Subgroup: Starting Timers

Fuel Solenoid Lead

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,0 .. 25,0 [s]
Default value 0,5 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 10525 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay between FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) and STARTER (PAGE 510) logical binary inputs.FUEL SOLENOID
(PAGE 493) is closed before STARTER (PAGE 510). Lead time is adjusted via this setpoint.

Image 8.4 Fuel Solenoid Lead

Note: LBO PRESTART (PAGE 506) goes to logical zero when Fuel Solenoid Lead goes to logical one..

6 back to List of setpoints

Idle Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 12 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9097 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Idle Time delay starts when RPM exceeds Starting RPM (page 166). Start fail is detected when during Idle
state RPM decreases below 2 RPM.
The output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 503) remains inactive during the idle period. Binary output Idle/Nominal
opens during Cooling period again. This output can be used for switching the governor between idle and
nominal speed.

InteliLite Global Guide 169

 Image 8.5 Idle Time 1

Image 8.6 Idle Time 2

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 170

 Minimal Stabilization Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. Maximal Stabilization Time (page 172) [s]
Default value 2s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8259 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When the gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the controller will wait for a period
adjusted by this setpoint before closing GCB, even if the generator voltage and frequency are already in
limits.

Image 8.7 Minimal Stabilization Time

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 171

 Maximal Stabilization Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Minimal Stabilization Time (page 171) .. 300 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8313 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When the gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the generator voltage and frequency must
get within limits within this period of time, otherwise an appropriate shutdown alarm (generator voltage and/or
frequency) is issued.

Image 8.8 Maximal Stabilization Time

6 back to List of setpoints

Protect Hold Off

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,0 .. 300,0 [s]
Default value 5,0 s Alternative config YES
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 10023 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
During the start of the gen-set, some engine protections have to be blocked (e.g. Oil pressure). The
protections are unblocked after the Protect Hold Off. The time starts after reaching Starting RPM.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 172

 Sd Ventilation Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 60 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9695 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
In case Fuel Solenoid (page 164) is set to GAS, the Sd Ventilation Time adjusts the time of the starter to be
switched on for engine pre-ventilation in the case of a first start attempt after shutdown or controller switch-
on.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Stopping

Cooling Speed
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Idle / Nominal [-]
Default value Nominal Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10046 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Selects the function of the binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 503) during engine cooling state.
Idle Cooling is executed at Idle speed and generator protections are switched off.
Nominal Cooling is executed at Nominal speed and generator protections are active.

Note: When ECU is connected the predefined value 900 RPM for Idle speed is requested.

Note: Binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 503) must be configured and connected to speed governor.
Engine Idle speed must be adjusted on speed governor.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 173

 Subgroup: Stopping Timers

Cooling Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 30 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8258 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Runtime of the unloaded gen-set to cool the engine before stop.

6 back to List of setpoints

Stop Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 60 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9815 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Under normal conditions the engine must certainly stop within this period after the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
493) has been de-energized and the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 511) energized. The stop solenoid remains
energized for the entire stop time period.

Image 8.9 Stop Time 1

InteliLite Global Guide 174

 Image 8.10 Stop Time 2

6 back to List of setpoints

After Cooling Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 180 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8662 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Runtime of engine after cooling pump. Binary output Cooling pump is closed when the engine starts and
opens AfterCool time delayed after gen-set stops.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Engine Protections

Overspeed Sd
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 50 .. 150 [%]
Default value 115% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 160)
Comm object 8263 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for over speed protection. Relative to the nominal speed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 175

 Overspeed Overshot
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 50 [%]
Default value 20% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 160)
Comm object 14107 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint rise the upper limit of overspeed protection for the time which is defined in setpoint Overspeed
Overshot Period (page 176). In this time the upper limit of protection is Overspeed Sd (page 175) + Overspeed
Overshoot.
Note: This function is available only for GAS engines (Fuel Solenoid (page 164) = GAS). Also Gear Teeth
(page 160) has to be set to FGen->RPM.

6 back to List of setpoints

Overspeed Overshot Period

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 255 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14108 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Overspeed Overshot (page 176)
Description
Time for which is Overspeed Overshot (page 176) active. The timer starts in the same time when starter
starts.
Note: The setpoint is visible only, if Overspeed Overshot (page 176) is greater than 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 176

 Oil Pressure Wrn
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config YES
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 12895 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 546) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 546).

6 back to List of setpoints

Oil Pressure Sd
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 12779 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 546) is configured
Description
Shutdown threshold level for OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 546).

6 back to List of setpoints

Oil Pressure Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 3s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14341 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical analog input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 546) is configured or
Setpoint visibility
logical binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 458) is configured
Description
Delay for OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 546).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 177

 ECU Oil Pressure Wrn
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config YES
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Comm object 14426 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Warning threshold level for Oil pressure which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Oil Pressure Sd

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Comm object 14425 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Shutdown threshold level for Oil pressure which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Oil Pressure Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 3s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14427 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Delay for Oil pressure which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 178

 Coolant Temperature Wrn
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 12896 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543).

6 back to List of setpoints

Coolant Temperature Sd
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 12780 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543).

6 back to List of setpoints

Coolant Temperature Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14342 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical analog input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543) is configured or
Setpoint visibility
logical binary input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 451) is configured
Description
Delay for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 179

 ECU Coolant Temperature Wrn
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Comm object 14429 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Warning threshold level for Coolant temperature which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Coolant Temperature Sd

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Comm object 14428 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for Coolant temperature which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Coolant Temperature Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14430 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Delay for Coolant temperature which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 180

 Temperature Switch On
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is define by sensor curve (analog or ECU)
the value is defined by
Default value sensor curve (analog or Alternative config NO
ECU)
Step the step is defined by sensor curve (analog or ECU)
Comm object 8688 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output TEMPERATURE SWITCH (PAGE 513) is
Setpoint visibility
configured.
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output TEMPERATURE SWITCH (PAGE 513) on.
Note: Value from analog input has higher priority than ECU.

Image 8.11 Temperature Switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 181

 Temperature Switch Off
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is define by sensor curve (analog or ECU)
the value is defined by
Default value sensor curve (analog or Alternative config NO
ECU)
Step the step is defined by sensor curve (analog or ECU)
Comm object 8689 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output TEMPERATURE SWITCH (PAGE 513) is
Setpoint visibility
configured.
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output TEMPERATURE SWITCH (PAGE 513) off.
Note: Value from analog input has higher priority than ECU.

Image 8.12 Temperature Switch

6 back to List of setpoints

Coolant Temperature Low Wrn

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config YES
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9684 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543) is configured
Description
Threshold level for lower limit of COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 182

 Coolant Temperature Low Delay
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config YES
Step 1s
Comm object 10270 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543) is configured
Description
Delay for Coolant Temperature Low Wrn (page 182).

6 back to List of setpoints

Fuel Level Wrn

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 12897 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 544) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 544).

6 back to List of setpoints

Fuel Level Sd
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 12898 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 544) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 544).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 183

 Fuel Level Delay
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14343 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 544) is configured or logical
Setpoint visibility
binary input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 454) is configured
Description
Delay for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 544).

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Fuel Level Wrn

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Comm object 14432 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Warning threshold level for Fuel level which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Fuel Level Sd

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Comm object 14431 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for Fuel level which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 184

 ECU Fuel Level Delay
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14433 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configuredd
Description
Delay for Fuel level which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

Fuel Tank Volume

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 10 000 [l]
Default value 200 l Alternative config YES
Step 1l
Comm object 11103 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 544) is or ECU is configured
Description
Define a capacity of gen-set fuel tank.

6 back to List of setpoints

Maximal Fuel Drop

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 50 [%/h]
Default value 25 %/h Alternative config NO
Step 1%/h
Comm object 12373 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Setpoint indicates the maximum allowable drop of fuel in fuel tank per running hour. When the engine is not
running the maximal allowed fuel drop-off is preset to 5% of total tank volume per hour.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 185

 Maximal Fuel Drop Delay
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step s
Comm object 14683 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When the value of fuel drop per hour is higher than Maximal Fuel Drop (page 185) this delay stars count down.
After count down of this delay alarm Wrn Fuel Thief (page 569) is activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Fuel Pump On
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. Fuel Pump Off (page 187) [%]
Default value 20 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 10100 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) is configured and
Setpoint visibility
logical binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 454) isn’t configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) on.

Image 8.13 Fuel Pump On

IMPORTANT: When binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 454) is configured then binary
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) is control by this binary input. Setpoints Description (page 186)
and Fuel Pump Off (page 187) are not evaluated!

Note: Value from analog input has higher priority than ECU.

Note: This setpoint is visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) is configured.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 186

 Fuel Pump Off
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Fuel Pump On (page 186) .. 100 [%]
Default value 90 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 10101 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) is configured and
Setpoint visibility
logical binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 454) isn’t configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) off.

Image 8.14 Fuel Pump Off

IMPORTANT: When binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 454) is configured then binary
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) is control by this binary input. Setpoints Fuel Pump On (page 186)
and Fuel Pump Off (page 187) are not evaluated!

Note: Value from analog input has higher priority than ECU.

Note: This setpoint is visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) is configured.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 187

 Transfer Wrn Delay
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 60 [s]
Default value 30 s Alternative config YES
Step 1s
Comm object 10685 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) is configured
Description
If the controller does not see the fuel increase during fuel transfer within this time alarm Wrn Fuel Transfer
Failed (page 581) will be displayed and the FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) will be turned off. Alarm Wrn Fuel
Transfer Failed (page 581) will be displayed but this alarm becomes immediately inactive and it will be
possible to delete this message by the Fault reset button. If the fault is deleted the controller will initiate the
transfer again.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Maintenance

Maintenance Timer 1
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value 1 000 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 10528 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer 1 counts down when engine is running. If reaches zero, an alarm appears. When the
value 10000 is set, than the Maintenance function is disabled and counter does not count. Counter value
disappear from controllers statistics.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 188

 Maintenance Timer 2
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value 1 000 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 10529 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer 2 counts down when engine is running. If reaches zero, an alarm appears. When the
value 10000 is set, than the Maintenance function is disabled and counter does not count. Counter value
disappear from controllers statistics.

6 back to List of setpoints

Maintenance Timer 3
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value 1 000 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 10530 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer 3 counts down when engine is running. If reaches zero, an alarm appears. When the
value 10000 is set, than the Maintenance function is disabled and counter does not count. Counter value
disappear from controllers statistics.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Battery Protections

Battery Charge Fail Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 15 [min]
Default value 5 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 11374 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned with LBI BATTERY CHARGE (PAGE 450)
Description
Delay for LBI BATTERY CHARGE (PAGE 450).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 189

 Battery < Voltage
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 8,0 V .. Battery > Voltage (page 190) [V]
Default value 18,0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V
Comm object 8387 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning threshold for low battery voltage.

6 back to List of setpoints

Battery > Voltage

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Battery < Voltage (page 190) .. 40,0 [V]
Default value 36,0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V
Comm object 9587 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning threshold for high battery voltage.

6 back to List of setpoints

Battery <> Voltage Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8383 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Battery < Voltage (page 190) and Battery > Voltage (page 190) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Power switch

Power Switch On
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 32 000 [kW]

InteliLite Global Guide 190

 Default value 100 kW Alternative config NO
Step 1 kW
Comm object 11658 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output POWER SWITCH (PAGE 506) is configured.
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output POWER SWITCH (PAGE 506) on.

Image 8.15 Power Switch Level On < Level Off

Image 8.16 Power Switch Level On > Level Off

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 191

 Power Switch Off
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 32 000 [kW]
Default value 50 kW Alternative config NO
Step 1 kW
Comm object 11659 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output POWER SWITCH (PAGE 506) is configured.
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output POWER SWITCH (PAGE 506) on.

Image 8.17 Power Switch Level On < Level Off

Image 8.18 Power Switch Level On > Level Off

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 192

 Subgroup: ECU Settings

ECU Frequency Select

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Primary / Secondary / Default [-]
Default value Default Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10266 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
This setpoint is used for choosing a frequency of ECU. Values are saved in ECU.
VOLVO EMSII (GE engines)
The nominal speed is selected via the VP Status proprietary frame, parameter "Frequency select".
SCANIA EMS/S6
The nominal speed is selected via parameters "Nominal speed switch 1" and "Nominal speed switch 2" in
the DLN1 proprietary frame.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint ECU Frequency Select 1 (page
297) and ECU Frequency Select 2 (page 298).

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Speed Adjustment

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 9948 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment 1 (page
297) and ECU Speed Adjustment 2 (page 298).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 193

 Group: Generator settings
Subgroup: Overload Protection

Overload BOC
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 200 [%]
Default value 120 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Power (page 156)
Comm object 8280 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold level for generator overload (in % of Nominal power) protection. Protection is BOC (Breaker Open
and gen-set Cooldown).
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Overload Wrn
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 200 [%]
Default value 120 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Power (page 156)
Comm object 9685 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold level for generator overload (in % of Nominal power) protection. This is only warning.

6 back to List of setpoints

Overload BOC Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 5,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8281 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Overload BOC (page 194)Overload BOC (page 194) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 194

 Subgroup: Current Protection

Short Circuit BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 100 .. 500 [%]
Default value 250 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 156)
Comm object 8282 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
BOC occurs when generator current reaches this preset threshold.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Short Circuit BOC Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,00 .. 10,00 [s]
Default value 0,04 s Alternative config YES
Step 0,01 s
Comm object 9991 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Short Circuit BOC (page 195) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 195

 IDMT Overcurrent Delay
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1,0 .. 60,0 [s]
Default value 4,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8283 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
IDMT curve shape selection. Description (page 196) is a reaction time of IDMT protection for 200%
overcurrent Igen =2*Nominal Current (page 156)
IDMT is “very inverse” generator over current protection. Reaction time is not constant but depends on
generator over current level according to the following formula:
Overcurrent IDMT Delay * Nominal Current
Reaction time =
I genNominal Current

Note: Reaction time is limited to 3600 s = 60 minutes. IDMT protection is not active for Reaction time
values longer than 60 minutes.

Igen is maximal value of all measured phases of generator current.

Table 8.1 EXAMPLE of Reaction time for different over current levels

Overcurrent
Overcurrent IDMT Delay
≤ 100 % 101 % 110 %
Reaction time 0,2 s No action 20 s 2s
2s No action 200 s 20 s
20 s No action 2000 s 200 s

Image 8.19 IDMT Overcurrent Delay

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 196

 Current Unbalance BOC
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal Current (page 156)
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 156)
Comm object 8284 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator current asymmetry (unbalance). Protection is BOC (Breaker Open and genset
Cooldown).
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Current Unbalance BOC Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 5,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8285 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Current Unbalance BOC (page 197) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 197

 Subgroup: Voltage Protection

Generator > Voltage Sd

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Generator > Voltage Wrn (page 198) .. 200 [%]
Default value 110 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)
Comm object 8291 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator overvoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.
Note: Overvoltage protection is evaluated according to setting of setpoint Connection type (page 157).
3Ph4Wire and 3Ph3Wire connections are evaluated according to Ph-Ph nominal voltage (Nominal
Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)) and Split Phase and Mono Phase connections are evaluated according to Ph-
N nominal voltage (Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158)).

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator > Voltage Wrn

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Generator < Voltage Wrn (page 199) .. Generator > Voltage Sd (page 198) [%]
Default value 110 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)
Comm object 9686 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator overvoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.
Note: Overvoltage protection is evaluated according to setting of setpoint Connection type (page 157).
3Ph4Wire and 3Ph3Wire connections are evaluated according to Ph-Ph nominal voltage (Nominal
Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)) and Split Phase and Mono Phase connections are evaluated according to Ph-
N nominal voltage (Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158)).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 198

 Generator < Voltage BOC
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. Generator < Voltage Wrn (page 199) [%]
Default value 70 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)
Comm object 8293 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is used.
Note: Overvoltage protection is evaluated according to setting of setpoint Connection type (page 157).
3Ph4Wire and 3Ph3Wire connections are evaluated according to Ph-Ph nominal voltage (Nominal
Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)) and Split Phase and Mono Phase connections are evaluated according to Ph-
N nominal voltage (Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158)).

Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator < Voltage Wrn

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199) .. Generator > Voltage Wrn (page 198) [%]
Default value 70 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)
Comm object 9687 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is used.
Note: Overvoltage protection is evaluated according to setting of setpoint Connection type (page 157).
3Ph4Wire and 3Ph3Wire connections are evaluated according to Ph-Ph nominal voltage (Nominal
Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)) and Split Phase and Mono Phase connections are evaluated according to Ph-
N nominal voltage (Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158)).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 199

 Generator <> Voltage Delay
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 3,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 9103 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Generator > Voltage Sd (page 198), Generator > Voltage Wrn (page 198), Generator < Voltage BOC
(page 199) and Generator < Voltage Wrn (page 199) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Voltage Unbalance BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)
Default value 10 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)
Comm object 8288 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 157)
Description
Threshold for generator voltage unbalance alarm.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 3,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8289 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 157)
Description
Delay for Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 200) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 200

 Subgroup: Frequency Protection

Generator > Frequency BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Generator > Frequency Wrn (page 201) .. 200,0 [%]
Default value 110,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 159)
Comm object 8296 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator > Frequency Wrn

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Generator < Frequency Wrn (page 202) .. Generator > Frequency BOC (page 201) [%]
Default value 110,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 159)
Comm object 9688 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator < Frequency BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,0 .. Generator < Frequency Wrn (page 202) [%]
Default value 85,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 159)
Comm object 8298 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 201

 Generator < Frequency Wrn
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Generator < Frequency BOC (page 201) .. Generator > Frequency Wrn (page 201) [%]
Default value 85,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 159)
Comm object 9689 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator <> Frequency BOC Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 3,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8297 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Generator < Frequency BOC (page 201) and Generator > Frequency BOC (page 201) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: General Analog Inputs

General Analog Input 1

Analog Protection 1 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9259 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 516).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 202

 Analog Protection 1 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9260 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 516).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 1 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9261 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 516).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 203

 Analog Switch 1 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 11407 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 1 (PAGE 476) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output ANALOG SWITCH 1 (PAGE 476) on. The value is measured
from AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 536) analog input.

Image 8.20 General analog input 1 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 204

 Analog Switch 1 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 11410 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 1 (PAGE 476) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output ANALOG SWITCH 1 (PAGE 476) off. The value is measured
from AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 536) analog input.

Image 8.21 General analog input 1 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 2

Analog Protection 2 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9262 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 02 (PAGE 517).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 205

 Analog Protection 2 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9263 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 02 (PAGE 517).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 2 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9264 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 02 (PAGE 517).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 206

 Analog Switch 2 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 11408 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 2 (PAGE 477) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 536) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 536) analog input.

Image 8.22 General analog input 2 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 207

 Analog Switch 2 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 11411 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 2 (PAGE 477) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 536) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 536) analog input.

Image 8.23 General analog input 2 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 3

Analog Protection 3 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9265 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 03 (PAGE 518).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 208

 Analog Protection 3 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9266 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 03 (PAGE 518).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 3 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9267 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 03 (PAGE 518).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 209

 Analog Switch 3 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 11409 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 3 (PAGE 477) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 03 (PAGE 536) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 03 (PAGE 536) analog input.

Image 8.24 General analog input 3 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 210

 Analog Switch 3 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 11412 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 3 (PAGE 477) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 03 (PAGE 536) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 03 (PAGE 536) analog input.

Image 8.25 General analog input 3 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 4

Analog Protection 4 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9268 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 04 (PAGE 519).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 211

 Analog Protection 4 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9269 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 04 (PAGE 519).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 4 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9270 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 04 (PAGE 519).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 212

 Analog Switch 4 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14385 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.26 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 213

 Analog Switch 4 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14386 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.27 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 5

Analog Protection 5 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9271 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 05 (PAGE 520).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 214

 Analog Protection 5 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9272 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 05 (PAGE 520).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 5 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9273 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 05 (PAGE 520).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 215

 Analog Switch 5 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14963 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 05 (PAGE 537) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 05 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.28 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 216

 Analog Switch 5 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14979 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 05 (PAGE 537) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 05 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.29 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 6

Analog Protection 6 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9274 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 06 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 217

 Analog Protection 6 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9275 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 06 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 6 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9276 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 06 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 218

 Analog Switch 6 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14964 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 06 (PAGE 537) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.30 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 219

 Analog Switch 6 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14980 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 06 (PAGE 537) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.31 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 7

Analog Protection 7 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9277 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 07 (PAGE 522).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 220

 Analog Protection 7 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9278 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 07 (PAGE 522).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 7 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9279 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 07 (PAGE 522).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 221

 Analog Switch 7 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14965 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 07 (PAGE 538) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.32 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 222

 Analog Switch 7 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14981 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 07 (PAGE 538) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.33 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 8

Analog Protection 8 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9280 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 08 (PAGE 523).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 223

 Analog Protection 8 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9281 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 08 (PAGE 523).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 8 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9282 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 08 (PAGE 523).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 224

 Analog Switch 8 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14966 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 08 (PAGE 538) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.34 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 225

 Analog Switch 8 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14982 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 08 (PAGE 538) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.35 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 9

Analog Protection 9 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9283 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 09 (PAGE 524).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 226

 Analog Protection 9 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9284 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 09 (PAGE 524).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 9 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9285 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 09 (PAGE 524).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 227

 Analog Switch 9 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14967 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 09 (PAGE 538) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.36 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 228

 Analog Switch 9 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14983 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 09 (PAGE 538) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.37 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 10

Analog Protection 10 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9286 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 10 (PAGE 525).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 229

 Analog Protection 10 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9287 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 10 (PAGE 525).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 10 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9288 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 10 (PAGE 525).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 230

 Analog Switch 10 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14968 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 10 (PAGE 539) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.38 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 231

 Analog Switch 10 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14984 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 10 (PAGE 539) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.39 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 11

Analog Protection 11 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9289 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 11 (PAGE 526).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 232

 Analog Protection 11 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9290 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 11 (PAGE 526).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 11 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9291 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 11 (PAGE 526).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 233

 Analog Switch 11 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14969 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 11 (PAGE 539) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.40 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 234

 Analog Switch 11 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14985 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 11 (PAGE 539) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.41 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 12

Analog Protection 12 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9292 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 12 (PAGE 527).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 235

 Analog Protection 12 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9293 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 12 (PAGE 527).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 12 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9294 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 12 (PAGE 527).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 236

 Analog Switch 12 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14970 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 12 (PAGE 539) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.42 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 237

 Analog Switch 12 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14986 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 12 (PAGE 539) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.43 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 13

Analog Protection 13 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9295 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 13 (PAGE 528).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 238

 Analog Protection 13 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9296 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 13 (PAGE 528).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 13 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9297 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 13 (PAGE 528).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 239

 Analog Switch 13 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14971 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 13 (PAGE 540) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.44 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 240

 Analog Switch 13 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14987 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 13 (PAGE 540) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.45 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 14

Analog Protection 14 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9298 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 14 (PAGE 529).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 241

 Analog Protection 14 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9299 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 14 (PAGE 529).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 14 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9300 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 14 (PAGE 529).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 242

 Analog Switch 14 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14972 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 14 (PAGE 540) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.46 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 243

 Analog Switch 14 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14988 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 14 (PAGE 540) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.47 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 15

Analog Protection 15 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9301 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 15 (PAGE 530).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 244

 Analog Protection 15 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9302 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 15 (PAGE 530).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 15 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9303 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 15 (PAGE 530).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 245

 Analog Switch 15 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14973 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 15 (PAGE 540) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.48 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 246

 Analog Switch 15 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14989 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 15 (PAGE 540) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.49 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 16

Analog Protection 16 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9304 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 16 (PAGE 531).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 247

 Analog Protection 16 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9305 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 16 (PAGE 531).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 16 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9306 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 16 (PAGE 531).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 248

 Analog Switch 16 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14974 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 16 (PAGE 541) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.50 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 249

 Analog Switch 16 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14990 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 16 (PAGE 541) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.51 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 17

Analog Protection 17 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9307 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 17 (PAGE 532).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 250

 Analog Protection 17 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9308 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 17 (PAGE 532).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 17 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9309 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 17 (PAGE 532).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 251

 Analog Switch 17 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14975 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 17 (PAGE 541) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.52 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 252

 Analog Switch 17 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14991 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 17 (PAGE 541) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.53 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 18

Analog Protection 18 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9310 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 18 (PAGE 533).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 253

 Analog Protection 18 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9311 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 18 (PAGE 533).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 18 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9312 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 18 (PAGE 533).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 254

 Analog Switch 18 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14976 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 18 (PAGE 541) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.54 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 255

 Analog Switch 18 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14992 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 18 (PAGE 541) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.55 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 19

Analog Protection 19 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9313 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 19 (PAGE 534).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 256

 Analog Protection 19 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9314 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 19 (PAGE 534).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 19 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9315 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 19 (PAGE 534).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 257

 Analog Switch 19 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14977 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 19 (PAGE 542) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.56 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 258

 Analog Switch 19 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14993 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 19 (PAGE 542) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.57 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 20

Analog Protection 20 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9316 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 20 (PAGE 535).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 259

 Analog Protection 20 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9317 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 20 (PAGE 535).

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 20 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9318 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 20 (PAGE 535).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 260

 Analog Switch 20 On
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14978 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 20 (PAGE 542) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.58 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 261

 Analog Switch 20 Off
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 14994 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical binary output ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478) is
Setpoint visibility
configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 20 (PAGE 542) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.59 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Scheduler
Subgroup: Time & Date

Time
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] HH:MM:SS [-]
Default value 0:0:0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24554 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Real time clock adjustment.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 262

 Date
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] DD/MM/YYYY [-]
Default value 1.1.2015 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24553 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Actual date adjustment.

6 back to List of setpoints

Time Stamp Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 240 [min]
Default value 60 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 8979 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Time interval for periodic history records.

6 back to List of setpoints

Summer Time Mode

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disabled / Winter / Summer / Winter - S / Summer - S [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8727 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Behavior of switching between winter and summer time.

Disable Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is disabled.

Winter Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is enabled and it is set to winter
(Summer) (summer) season.
Winter - S
Modification for southern hemisphere.
(Summer - S)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 263

 Subgroup: Timer 1

Timer 1 Function
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disable / No Func / /Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11660 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is possible to choose out of 5 following timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 1 (PAGE 492) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require controller
running in AUTO mode.
Timer 1 has higher priority over Timer 2. So if Timer 1 Function (page 264) is configured for OFF mode and
Timer 2 Function (page 271) is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in OFF
mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already running.

Disable The Timer 1 is disabled.

No Func There is no any other function, only binary output Timer 1 is activated.
Auto Run When this option is chosen then the Timer output is internally connected to the REMOTE
START /STOP (PAGE 460) binary input.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the Timer 1 binary output is internally connected to the
Remote OFF binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 264

 Timer Setup
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10969 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Related setpoints for timer 1 are:
Timer 1 Function (page 264) Timer 1 Day (page 269)
Timer 1 Repetition (page 265) Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 270)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 266) Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 270)
Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 266) Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 271)
Timer 1 Duration (page 266) Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 268)
Timer 1 Repeated (page 267) Timer 1 Weekends (page 269)
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 270)

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Repetition
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 1 Function (page 264).

Off Timer 1 Function (page 264) will not be activated.

Once Timer 1 Function (page 264) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 1 Function (page 264) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 265

 Timer 1 First Occur. Date
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264)
Description
Date of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 264).

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 264).

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Duration
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264)
Description
Timer 1 Function (page 264) duration time.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 266

 Timer 1 Repeated
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 1 Function (page 264).

Daily Timer 1 Function (page 264) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 1 Function (page 264) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 1 Function (page 264) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen days of
chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 1 Function (page 264) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 267

 Timer 1 Refresh Period
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 1 Function (page 264). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 1 Repeated (page 267).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer will be
activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
second day from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 264), the Timer 1
Function (page 264) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer will be
activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
Weekly
second week from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 264), the Timer 1
Function (page 264) will be activated in selected days adjusted by Timer 1 Day
(page 269).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer will be
activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
Monthly second month from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 264), the Timer 1
Function (page 264) will be activated in selected day of month adjusted by Timer 1
Repeat Day In Month (page 270) or in selected days of week of month adjusted by
Timer 1 Day (page 269) and Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 271).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer will
be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 264), the
Timer 1 Function (page 264) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 268

 Timer 1 Weekends
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264)
Description
Behavior of Timer 1 Function (page 264) on weekends.

Timer 1 Function (page 264) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 1 Function
Including
(page 264) can be active.
Timer 1 Function (page 264) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 1 Function
Skip
(page 264) isn’t active.
Timer 1 Function (page 264) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 1 Function
(page 264) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the weekend, than timer will
Postpone
be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is counted from original date of
first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Day
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down buttons.
To change the value of day use Enter button.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 269

 Timer 1 Repeat Day
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 1 Function (page 264).

Repeated Day Chose one day in month when Timer 1 Function (page 264) will be activated.
Repeated Day In Week Chose days in one week when Timer 1 Function (page 264) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 List of setpoints (page 150)

Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 1 Function (page 264) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 270

 Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 264)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 1 Function (page 264) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Timer 2

Timer 2 Function
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disable / No Func / /Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value No Func Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11661 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is possible to choose out of 5 following Timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 2 (PAGE 492) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require controller
running in AUTO mode.
Timer 1 has higher priority over Timer 2. So if Timer 1 Function (page 264) is configured for OFF mode and
Timer 2 Function (page 271) is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in OFF
mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already running.

Disable The Timer 1 is disabled.

No Func There is no any other function, only binary output Timer 1 is activated.
Auto Run When this option is chosen then the Timer output is internally connected to the REMOTE
START /STOP (PAGE 460) binary input.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the Timer 1 binary output is internally connected to the
Remote OFF binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 271

 Timer Setup
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10970 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Related setpoints for timer 2 are:
Timer 2 Function (page 271) Timer 2 Day (page 276)
Timer 2 Repetition (page 272) Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week (page 277)
Timer 2 First Occur. Date (page 273) Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month (page 277)
Timer 2 Start Time (page 273) Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month (page 278)
Timer 2 Duration (page 273) Timer 2 Refresh Period (page 275)
Timer 2 Repeated (page 274) Timer 2 Weekends (page 276)
Timer 2 Repeat Day (page 277)

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Repetition
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 271)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 2 Function (page 271).

Off Timer 2 Function (page 271) will not be activated.

Once Timer 2 Function (page 271) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 2 Function (page 271) will be repeatedly activated.

6 List of setpoints (page 150)

InteliLite Global Guide 272

 Timer 2 First Occur. Date
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 271)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 2 Function (page 271).

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Start Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 271)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 271).

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Duration
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 271)
Description
Timer 2 Function (page 271) duration time.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 273

 Timer 2 Repeated
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 271)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 2 Function (page 271).

Daily Timer 2 Function (page 271) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 2 Function (page 271) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 2 Function (page 271) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen days of
chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 2 Function (page 271) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 List of setpoints (page 150)

InteliLite Global Guide 274

 Timer 2 Refresh Period
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 271)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 2 Function (page 271). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 2 Repeated (page 274).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer will be
activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
second day from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 271), the Timer 2
Function (page 271) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer will be
activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
Weekly
second week from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 271), the Timer 2
Function (page 271) will be activated in selected days adjusted by Timer 2 Day
(page 276).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer will be
activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
Monthly second month from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 271), the Timer 2
Function (page 271) will be activated in selected day of month adjusted by Timer 2
Repeat Day In Month (page 277) or in selected days of week of month adjusted by
Timer 2 Day (page 276) and Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month (page 278).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer will
be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 271), the
Timer 2 Function (page 271) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 275

 Timer 2 Weekends
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 271)
Description
Behavior of Timer 2 Function (page 271) on weekends.

Timer 2 Function (page 271) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 2 Function
Including
(page 271) can be active.
Timer 2 Function (page 271) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 2 Function
Skip
(page 271) isn’t active.
Timer 2 Function (page 271) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 2 Function
(page 271) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the weekend, than timer will
Postpone
be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is counted from original date of
first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Day
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 271)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down buttons.
To change the value of day use Enter button.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 276

 Timer 2 Repeat Day
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 271)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 2 Function (page 271).

Repeated Day Chose one day in month when Timer 2 Function (page 271) will be activated.
Repeated Day In Week Chose days in one week when Timer 2 Function (page 271) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 271)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 List of setpoints (page 150)

Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 271)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 2 Function (page 271) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 277

 Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 271)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 2 Function (page 271) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Rental Timers

Rental Timer 1
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 8 760 [h]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 14326 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Another engine start is not allowed when this timer elapsed. This timer is based on engine running hours. The
alarm Rental Timer 1 Elapsed (page 566) will be recorded in alarm list and the binary output AL RENTAL
TIMER 1 (PAGE 474) will close.
IMPORTANT: To reset Rental Timer 1 (page 278) we have to set up Rental Timer 1 (page 278)
again. It means go to setpoint group Scheduler and to the setpoint Rental Timer 1 (page 278).
Then press enter button , change the value if it is necessary and press enter button
again.

When the Rental Timer 1 (page 278) elapsed during engine run the gen-set will not stop immediately. The
adjustable Rental Timer BOC (page 282)timer will start in this moment. The engine will be cooled and stopped
when the Rental Timer BOC (page 282) time elapsed.

InteliLite Global Guide 278

 Image 8.60 Rental Timer 1

The Running Hours Overrun counter will start increment when the engine is continue running after the Rental
Timer 1 (page 278) elapsed.
Note: There is no priority between Rental Timer 1 and Rental Timer 2. The sooner timer will activated the
Rental Timer BOC (page 282) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 279

 Rental Timer 1 Wrn
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disabled / 1.. Rental Timer 1 (page 278) [h]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 14332 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Rental Timer 1 (page 278)
Description
Alarm Wrn Rental Timer 1 (page 575) comes up after xx running hours from adjusting the Rental Timer 1
(page 278). Hours are adjusted by this setpoint.

Image 8.61 Rental Timer 1 Wrn

6 back to List of setpoints

Rental Timer 2
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2015 Alternative config NO
Step 1 day
Comm object 14367 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Another engine start is not allowed when this timer elapsed. This timer is based on date. At the midnight of
the last day the alarm Rental Timer 2 Elapsed (page 566) will be recorded in alarm list and the binary
output AL RENTAL TIMER 2 (PAGE 475) will close.
IMPORTANT: To reset Rental Timer 2 (page 280) we have to set up Rental Timer 2 (page 280)
again. It means go to setpoint group Scheduler and to the setpoint Rental Timer 2 (page 280).
Then press enter button , change the value if it is necessary and press enter button
again.

IMPORTANT: To disable Rental Timer 2 (page 280) set date to 01/01/2015.

InteliLite Global Guide 280

 When the Rental Timer 2 (page 280) elapsed during engine run the gen-set will not stop immediately. The
adjustable Rental Timer BOC (page 282) timer will start in this moment. The engine will be cooled and stopped
when the Rental Timer BOC (page 282) time elapsed.

Image 8.62 Rental Timer 2

The Running Hours Overrun counter will start increment when the engine is continue running after the Rental
Timer 2 (page 280) elapsed.
Note: There is no priority between Rental Timer 1 and Rental Timer 2. The sooner timer will activated the
Rental Timer BOC (page 282) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 281

 Rental Timer 2 Wrn
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disabled / 01/01/2015 .. Rental Timer 2 (page 280) [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2015 Alternative config NO
Step 1 day
Comm object 14368 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Rental Timer 2 (page 280)
Description
Alarm Wrn Rental Timer 2 (page 575) comes up xx days before the Rental Timer 2 (page 280). Days are
adjusted by this setpoint.

Image 8.63 Rental Timer 2 Wrn

6 back to List of setpoints

Rental Timer BOC

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 210 [h]
Default value 24 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 14334 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoints Rental Timer 1 (page 278) and Rental Timer 2 (page 280)
Description
This timer will start after Rental Timer 1 (page 278) or Rental Timer 2 (page 280) elapsed in case that the
engine is still running. When this timer elapsed the engine is cooled and stopped.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 282

 Group: Geo-Fencing
Home Latitude
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] -90,0000..90,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Comm object 14606 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjust latitude of "home" position. Home is position where gen-set should runs. Positions on
north hemisphere have positive value, position on south hemisphere have negative value.
Note: This value with Home Longitude (page 283) are used for counting Fence Radius 1 (page 284) and
Fence Radius 2 (page 284).

Note: This value can be also obtained automatically via logical binary input GEO HOME POSITION (PAGE
455). In case of activation of this binary input for at least 2 seconds, setpoint will be adjusted
automatically from actual coordinates from GPS signal.

6 back to List of setpoints

Home Longitude
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] -180,0000..180,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Comm object 14607 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjust longitude of "home" position. Home is position where gen-set should runs. Positions on
east hemisphere have positive value, position on west hemisphere have negative value.
Note: This value with Home Latitude (page 283) are used for counting Fence Radius 1 (page 284) and
Fence Radius 2 (page 284).

Note: This value can be also obtained automatically via logical binary input GEO HOME POSITION (PAGE
455). In case of activation of this binary input for at least 2 seconds, setpoint will be adjusted
automatically from actual coordinates from GPS signal.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 283

 Fence Radius 1
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,0..99,9 [km]
Default value 0,0 km Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 km
Comm object 11677 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Radius for circle area 1. When the gen-set leaves this area, Fence 1 Protection (page 286) is activated after
Fence 1 Delay (page 284).
Note: The center of this circle area is defined by "Home" position - setpoints Home Longitude (page 283)
and Home Latitude (page 283).

6 back to List of setpoints

Fence Radius 2
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,0..99,9 [km]
Default value 0,0 km Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 km
Comm object 14608 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Radius for circle area 2. When the gen-set leaves this area, Fence 2 Protection (page 287) is activated after
Fence 2 Delay (page 285).
Note: The center of this circle area is defined by "Home" position - setpoints Home Longitude (page 283)
and Home Latitude (page 283).

6 back to List of setpoints

Fence 1 Delay
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0..3600 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 11682 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Delay for Fence 1 Protection (page 286).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 284

 Fence 2 Delay
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0..3600 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14609 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Delay for Fence 2 Protection (page 287).

6 back to List of setpoints

Geo-Fencing
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled / LBI Enable [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11681 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables geo-fencing function.

Disabled Fence 1 Protection (page 286) and Fence 2 Protection (page 287) are disabled.
Enabled Fence 1 Protection (page 286) and Fence 2 Protection (page 287) are enabled.
Fence 1 Protection (page 286) and Fence 2 Protection (page 287) are enabled only when
LBI Enable
logical binary input .GEO-FENCING ENABLED (PAGE 456) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 285

 Fence 1 Protection
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] HistRecOnl / Wrn / Sd / BOC[-]
Default value HistRecOnl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14610 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Protection type for geo-fencing 1 protection. Fence of circle area is adjusted by setpoint Fence Radius 1 (page
284). Delay for protection is adjusted by setpoint Fence 1 Delay (page 284).

Protection types
HistRecOnl Position of gen-set is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used
for protection. History record is made if position is out of Fence Radius 1 (page 284).
Wrn Position of gen-set is used for warning protection only. Protection is activated when
position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 1 (page 284).
Sd Position of gen-set is used for shutdown protection. Protection is activated when
position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 1 (page 284).
BOC Position of gen-set is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection. Protection
is activated when position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 1 (page 284).

Note: Protection is activated also when GPS signal is lost for Fence 1 Delay (page 284).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 286

 Fence 2 Protection
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] HistRecOnl / Wrn / Sd / BOC[-]
Default value HistRecOnl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14611 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Protection type for geo-fencing 2 protection. Fence of circle area is adjusted by setpoint Fence Radius 2 (page
284). Delay for protection is adjusted by setpoint Fence 2 Delay (page 285).

Protection types
HistRecOnl Position of gen-set is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used
for protection. History record is made if position is out of Fence Radius 2 (page 284).
Wrn Position of gen-set is used for warning protection only. Protection is activated when
position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 2 (page 284).
Sd Position of gen-set is used for shutdown protection. Protection is activated when
position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 2 (page 284).
BOC Position of gen-set is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection. Protection
is activated when position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 2 (page 284).

Note: Protection is activated also when GPS signal is lost for Fence 2 Delay (page 285).

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Plug-In Modules

Slot A
Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24280 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot A.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 287

 Slot B
Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24279 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot B.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Sensors Spec

Subgroup: Analog Input 1

Analog Input 1 Calibration

Setpoint group Sensors Spec Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
0 (number of decimal is
Default value Alternative config NO
given by sensor curve)
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 8431 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Calibrating constant to adjust the measured value of controller analog inputs. Physical dimension of
calibrating constant is corresponding to Analog input.
Note: Unit is adjusted via LiteEdit2015 in configuration of analog input 1.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 288

 Subgroup: Analog Input 2

Analog Input 2 Calibration

Setpoint group Sensors Spec Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
0 (number of decimal is
Default value Alternative config NO
given by sensor curve)
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 8407 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Calibrating constant to adjust the measured value of controller analog inputs. Physical dimension of
calibrating constant is corresponding to Analog input.
Note: Unit is adjusted via LiteEdit2015 in configuration of analog input 2.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Analog Input 3

Analog Input 3 Calibration

Setpoint group Sensors Spec Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
0 (number of decimal is
Default value Alternative config NO
given by sensor curve)
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 8467 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Calibrating constant to adjust the measured value of controller analog inputs. Physical dimension of
calibrating constant is corresponding to Analog input.
Note: Unit is adjusted via LiteEdit2015 in configuration of analog input 3.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 289

 Subgroup: Analog Input 4

Analog Input 4 Calibration

Setpoint group Sensors Spec Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
0 (number of decimal is
Default value Alternative config NO
given by sensor curve)
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 8793 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Calibrating constant to adjust the measured value of controller analog inputs. Physical dimension of
calibrating constant is corresponding to Analog input.
Note: Unit is adjusted via LiteEdit2015 in configuration of analog input 4.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Alternate Config

Subgroup: Basic settings

Connection Type 1
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Monophase / Splitphase / 3Ph3Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph4Wire / Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12058 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) isn’t active, then setpoint Connection type (page
157) has the same value as setpoint Connection Type 1 . Setpoint Connection type (page 157) can be
changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 290

 Nominal Current 1
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 12049 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 290).
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) isn’t active, then setpoint Nominal Current (page
156) has the same value as setpoint Nominal Current 1. Setpoint Nominal Current (page 156) can be
changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Frequency 1
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 45 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Comm object 9913 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) isn’t active, then setpoint Nominal Frequency (page
159) has the same value as setpoint Nominal Frequency 1. Setpoint Nominal Frequency (page 159) can be
changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal RPM 1
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 9915 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) isn’t active, then setpoint Nominal RPM (page 160)
has the same value as setpoint Nominal RPM 1. Setpoint Nominal RPM (page 160) can be changed from
both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 291

 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12052 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 290).
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) isn’t active, then setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N
(page 158) has the same value as setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 . Setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page
158) can be changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config
setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12055 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 290).
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) isn’t active, then setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph
(page 159) has the same value as setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1. Setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page
159) can be changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config
setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 292

 Connection type 2
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Monophase / Splitphase / 3Ph3Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph4Wire / Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12059 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint Connection type (page 157)
has the same value as setpoint Connection type 2. Setpoint Connection type (page 157) can be changed
from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Current 2
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 12050 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 293).
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint Nominal Current (page 156)
has the same value as setpoint Nominal Current 2. Setpoint Nominal Current (page 156) can be changed
from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Frequency 2
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 45 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Comm object 9914 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint Nominal Frequency (page
159) has the same value as setpoint Nominal Frequency 2. Setpoint Nominal Frequency (page 159) can be
changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 293

 Nominal RPM 2
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 9916 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint Nominal RPM (page 160) has
the same value as setpoint Nominal RPM 2. Setpoint Nominal RPM (page 160) can be changed from both
places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12053 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 293).
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page
158) has the same value as setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2. Setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158) can
be changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12056 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 293).
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page
159) has the same value as setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2. Setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)
can be changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint
group.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 294

 Connection type 3
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Monophase / Splitphase / 3Ph3Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph4Wire / Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12060 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 3 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint Connection type (page 157)
has the same value as setpoint Connection type 3. Setpoint Connection type (page 157) can be changed
from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Current 3
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 12051 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 293).
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 3 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint Nominal Current (page 156)
has the same value as setpoint Nominal Current 3. Setpoint Nominal Current (page 156) can be changed
from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Frequency 3
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 45 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Comm object 15197 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 3 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint Nominal Frequency (page
159) has the same value as setpoint Nominal Frequency 3. Setpoint Nominal Frequency (page 159) can be
changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 295

 Nominal RPM 3
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 15196 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 3 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint Nominal RPM (page 160) has
the same value as setpoint Nominal RPM 3. Setpoint Nominal RPM (page 160) can be changed from both
places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12054 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 293).
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 3 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page
158) has the same value as setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3. Setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158) can
be changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12057 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 293).
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 3 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page
159) has the same value as setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3. Setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)
can be changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint
group.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 296

 Subgroup: Engine settings

ECU Frequency Select 1

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Primary / Secondary / Default [-]
Default value Default Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14335 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) isn’t active, then setpoint ECU Frequency Select
(page 193) has the same value as setpoint ECU Frequency Select 1. Setpoint ECU Frequency Select (page
193) can be changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config
setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Speed Adjustment 1

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 14337 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) isn’t active, then setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment
(page 193) has the same value as setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment 1. Setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page
193) can be changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config
setpoint group.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 297

 ECU Frequency Select 2
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Primary / Secondary / Default [-]
Default value Default Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14336 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint ECU Frequency Select (page
193) has the same value as setpoint ECU Frequency Select 2 . Setpoint ECU Frequency Select (page 193)
can be changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint
group.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Speed Adjustment 2

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 14338 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 2 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page
193) has the same value as setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment 2. Setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 193)
can be changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint
group.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 298

 ECU Frequency Select 3
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Primary / Secondary / Default [-]
Default value Default Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15198 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 3 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint ECU Frequency Select (page
193) has the same value as setpoint ECU Frequency Select 3 3. Setpoint ECU Frequency Select (page 193)
can be changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint
group.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Speed Adjustment 3

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 15199 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
When logical binary input CONFIGURATION 3 (PAGE 450) is active, then setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page
193) has the same value as setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment 3. Setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 193)
can be changed from both places - from Basic settings setpoint group and from Alternate Config setpoint
group.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 299

 Group: CM-RS232-485
COM1 Mode
Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS [-]
Default value Direct Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24522 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM1 channel.

Direct LiteEdit2015 communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.

6 back to List of setpoints

COM1 Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Default value 57600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24341 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
300)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM1 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line can
be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

6 List of setpoints (page 150)

InteliLite Global Guide 300

 COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed
Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 9600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24477 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
300)
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM1 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.

6 List of setpoints (page 150)

COM2 Mode
Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS [-]
Default value Direct Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24451 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM2 channel.

Direct LiteEdit2015 communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.

6 back to List of setpoints

COM2 Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Default value 57600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24340 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM2 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
301)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM2 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line can
be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

6 List of setpoints (page 150)

InteliLite Global Guide 301

 COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed
Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 9600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24420 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM2 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
301)
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM2 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.

6 List of setpoints (page 150)

Group: CM-GPRS
Mode
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] Email+SMS / SMS Only[-]
Default value Email+SMS Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24315 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjust the communication mode of module.

Controller is connected to the Internet and is able to send e-mails as well as SMS. The
Email+SMS controller is also accessible via AirGate. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used. Also APN
Name (page 315) has to be adjusted.
SMS Only Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required.

IMPORTANT: When this setpoint is changed the controller has to be restarted to apply
changes.

6 List of setpoints (page 150)

InteliLite Global Guide 302

 APN Name
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24363 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
APN (Access Point Name) of the GPRS/4G network, provided by GSM operator.

6 back to List of setpoints

APN User Name

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24361 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
User name for the GPRS/4G Access Point if authentication is required. But mostly it is not required and
should be left blank.

6 back to List of setpoints

APN User Password

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24360 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
User password for the GPRS/4G Access Point if authentication is required. But mostly it is not required and
should be left blank.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 303

 Email Address 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24298 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Email Address 2
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24297 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 304

 Email Address 3
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24145 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Email Address 4
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24144 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 305

 Email/SMS Language
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24299 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
Note: Numbers correspond with languages in language list. See the chapter for Language selection
(page 71) more information.

This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP User Name

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24313 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 306

 SMTP User Password
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24312 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP Server Address

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value airgate.comap.cz:9925 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24311 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) or number of port (with colon like a first mark) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet provider
or IT manager for this information.
Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels. If the device is connected to AirGate the AirGate SMTP server at "airgate.comap.cz" may be
used. Ports 25 and 9925 are supported. After controller connects to AirGate for the first time (or with new
public IP address), it may not be able to send emails for first 5-10 minutes.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 307

 SMTP Sender Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24310 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS module)
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.

IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

6 back to List of setpoints

Time Zone
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information about
sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 308

 Event Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10926 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Wrn Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8482 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

BOC Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10566 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 309

 Sd Messages
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8484 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Telephone Number 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24296 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 310

 Telephone Number 2
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24295 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

Telephone Number 3
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24143 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 311

 Telephone Number 4
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24142 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

DNS IP Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24314 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
The setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which is needed to translate domain names in
email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.

6 List of setpoints (page 150)

InteliLite Global Guide 312

 AirGate Connection
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24273 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
This setpoint enable or disable AirGate connection via CM-GPRS or via CM-4G-GPS.

DISABLED: Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required. AirGate is not used.
ENABLED This mode uses the “AirGate” service. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used. The
AirGate server address is adjusted by the setpoint AirGate Address (page 337).

IMPORTANT: When this setpoint is changed the controller has to be restarted to apply
changes.

6 back to List of setpoints

AirGate Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value airgate.comap.cz Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24364 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS module)
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free AirGate
server provided by ComAp at airgate.comap.cz.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 313

 ComAp TCP Port
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65 535[-]
Default value 23 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24374 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS module)
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the port number, which is used for Ethernet connection to a PC with any of
ComAp PC program (i.e. LiteEdit2015). This setpoint should be adjusted to 23, which is the default port used
by all ComAp PC programs. A different value should be used only in special situations as e.g. sharing one
public IP address among many controllers or to overcome a firewall restrictions.
IMPORTANT: If AirGate is used, this setpoint has to be adjusted to 23.

Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: CM-4G-GPS
Mode
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] Email+SMS / SMS Only[-]
Default value Email+SMS Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24315 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjust the communication mode of module.

Controller is connected to the Internet and is able to send e-mails as well as SMS. The
Email+SMS controller is also accessible via AirGate. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used. Also APN
Name (page 315) has to be adjusted.
SMS Only Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required.

IMPORTANT: When this setpoint is changed the controller has to be restarted to apply
changes.

6 List of setpoints (page 150)

InteliLite Global Guide 314

 APN Name
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24363 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
APN (Access Point Name) of the GPRS/4G network, provided by GSM operator.

6 back to List of setpoints

APN User Name

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24361 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
User name for the GPRS/4G Access Point if authentication is required. But mostly it is not required and
should be left blank.

6 back to List of setpoints

APN User Password

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24360 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
User password for the GPRS/4G Access Point if authentication is required. But mostly it is not required and
should be left blank.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 315

 Email Address 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24298 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Email Address 2
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24297 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 316

 Email Address 3
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24145 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Email Address 4
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24144 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 317

 Email/SMS Language
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24299 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
Note: Numbers correspond with languages in language list. See the chapter for Language selection
(page 71) more information.

This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP User Name

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24313 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 318

 SMTP User Password
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24312 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP Server Address

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value airgate.comap.cz:9925 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24311 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) or number of port (with colon like a first mark) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet provider
or IT manager for this information.
Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels. If the device is connected to AirGate the AirGate SMTP server at "airgate.comap.cz" may be
used. Ports 25 and 9925 are supported. After controller connects to AirGate for the first time (or with new
public IP address), it may not be able to send emails for first 5-10 minutes.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 319

 SMTP Sender Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24310 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS module)
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.

IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

6 back to List of setpoints

Time Zone
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information about
sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 320

 Event Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10926 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Wrn Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8482 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

BOC Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10566 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 321

 Sd Messages
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8484 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Telephone Number 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24296 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 322

 Telephone Number 2
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24295 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

Telephone Number 3
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24143 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 323

 Telephone Number 4
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24142 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

AirGate Connection
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS
Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24273 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314)
Description
This setpoint enable or disable AirGate connection via CM-GPRS or via CM-4G-GPS.

DISABLED: Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required. AirGate is not used.
ENABLED This mode uses the “AirGate” service. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used. The
AirGate server address is adjusted by the setpoint AirGate Address (page 337).

IMPORTANT: When this setpoint is changed the controller has to be restarted to apply
changes.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 324

 AirGate Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value airgate.comap.cz Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24364 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS module)
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free AirGate
server provided by ComAp at airgate.comap.cz.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

ComAp TCP Port

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65 535[-]
Default value 23 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24374 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS module)
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the port number, which is used for Ethernet connection to a PC with any of
ComAp PC program (i.e. LiteEdit2015). This setpoint should be adjusted to 23, which is the default port used
by all ComAp PC programs. A different value should be used only in special situations as e.g. sharing one
public IP address among many controllers or to overcome a firewall restrictions.
IMPORTANT: If AirGate is used, this setpoint has to be adjusted to 23.

Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 325

 Group: CM-Ethernet
Email Address 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24298 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Email Address 2
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24297 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 326

 Email Address 3
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24145 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Email Address 4
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24144 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules)
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 327

 Email/SMS Language
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24299 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
Note: Numbers correspond with languages in language list. See the chapter for Language selection
(page 71) more information.

This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Time Zone
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information about
sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 328

 Event Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10926 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Wrn Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8482 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

BOC Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10566 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 329

 Sd Messages
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8484 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP User Name

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24370 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP User Password

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0..15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24369 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 330

 SMTP Server Address
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value airgate.comap.cz:9925 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24368 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) or number of port (with colon like a first mark) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet provider
or IT manager for this information.
Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels. If the device is connected to AirGate the AirGate SMTP server at "airgate.comap.cz" may be
used. Ports 25 and 9925 are supported. After controller connects to AirGate for the first time (or with new
public IP address), it may not be able to send emails for first 5-10 minutes.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP Sender Address

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24367 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.

IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 331

 IP Address Mode
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] FIXED / AUTOMATIC [-]
Default value AUTOMATIC Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24259 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the ethernet connection is adjusted.

FIXED: The ethernet connection is adjusted fixedly according to the setpoints IP Address (page
332), Subnet Mask (page 333), Gateway IP (page 333) and DNS IP Address 1 (page 334).
This option is reccomended for Direct IP connection as the IP address of the device
should be static for this connection type.
AUTOMATIC: The Ethernet connection setting is obtained automatically from the DHCP server. The
obtained settings are visible in the values and the setpoints do not take place. Use this
option if you connect to the device only via AirGate or if you assure obtaining a static IP
address at the DHCP side.

6 back to List of setpoints

IP Address
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 192.168.1.254 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24376 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
332)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the IP Address is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 332) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the ethernet interface
of the controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 332) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The IP address is assigned by the
DHCP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 332

 Subnet Mask
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 255.255.255.0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24375 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
332)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Subnet Mask is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 332) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the Subnet Mask. Ask your IT
specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 332) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The Subnet Mask is assigned by the
DHCP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

Gateway IP
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 192.168.1.1 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24373 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
332)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Gateway IP is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 332) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the gateway of the
network segment where the controller is connected.
If IP Address Mode (page 332) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The gateway IP address is assigned
by the DHCP server.
A gateway is a device which connects the respective segment with the other segments and/or Internet.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 333

 DNS IP Address 1
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 8.8.8.8 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24362 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 1 is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 332) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which
is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 332) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

DNS IP Address 2
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 8.8.8.8 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24331 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 2 is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 332) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which
is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 332) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 334

 MODBUS Server
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24337 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enable or disable MODBUS communication via ethernet interface.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP Agent
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24336 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enable or disable SNMP v1 Agent.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP RD Community String

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value public Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24335 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page
Setpoint visibility
335)
Description
SNMP Community String only for reading.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 335

 SNMP WR Community String
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value private Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24334 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page
Setpoint visibility
335)
Description
SNMP Community String for writing and reading.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP Traps IP Address 1

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24294 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
IP address 1 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP Traps IP Address 2

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24293 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
IP address 2 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 336

 AirGate Connection
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24365 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint selects the Ethernet connection mode.

DISABLED: This is a standard mode in which the controller listens to the incoming traffic and answers
the TCP/IP queries addressed to it. This mode requires the controller to be accessible
from the remote device (PC), i.e. it must be accessible at a public and static IP address if
you want to connect to it from the internet.
ENABLED This mode enables the AirGate service. The AirGate server address is adjusted by the
setpoint AirGate Address (page 337). Also the standard TCP/IP is enabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

AirGate Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value airgate.comap.cz Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24364 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS module)
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free AirGate
server provided by ComAp at airgate.comap.cz.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 337

 ComAp TCP Port
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65 535[-]
Default value 23 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24374 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 314) (CM-
Setpoint visibility
GPRS module)
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the port number, which is used for Ethernet connection to a PC with any of
ComAp PC program (i.e. LiteEdit2015). This setpoint should be adjusted to 23, which is the default port used
by all ComAp PC programs. A different value should be used only in special situations as e.g. sharing one
public IP address among many controllers or to overcome a firewall restrictions.
IMPORTANT: If AirGate is used, this setpoint has to be adjusted to 23.

Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: EM-BIO8-EFCP
Earth Fault Current Protection
Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11631 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint can block or allow Earth fault Current protection.

DISABLED Earth fault current protection is blocked.

ENABLED Earth fault current protection is allowed. Behavior of Earth fault current protection is set
by these setpoints: Earth Fault CT Input Range (page 339), Earth Fault CT Ratio (page
339), Earth Fault Delay (page 339) and Earth Fault Sd (page 340).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 338

 Earth Fault Delay
Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,03 .. 5,00 [s]
Default value 0,10 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 s
Comm object 11633 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Delay for Earth Fault Current protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Earth Fault CT Input Range

Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 [A] / 5 [A]
Default value 5A Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14340 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
There are 2 physical inputs for Earth Fault Current Protection (page 338). Value of this setpoint has to be set
on value of physical input which is presently in use.

6 back to List of setpoints

Earth Fault CT Ratio

Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 1 .. 2000 [1/(1or5)A]
Default value 500 1/(1or5)A Alternative config NO
Step 1A/1A; 1A/5A
Comm object 14339 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Earth Fault current transformer ratio.
Note: Type of units depends on setpoint Earth Fault CT Input Range (page 339) which have to be set
before this setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 339

 Earth Fault Sd
Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] 0,03 .. 5,00 [A]
Default value 0,30 A Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 [A]
Comm object 11632 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Limit value for Earth Fault Current protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: PLC
PLC Setpoint 1
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10440 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.64 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 340

 PLC Setpoint 2
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10441 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.65 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 341

 PLC Setpoint 3
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10442 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.66 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 342

 PLC Setpoint 4
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10443 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.67 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 343

 PLC Setpoint 5
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10444 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.68 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 344

 PLC Setpoint 6
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10445 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.69 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 345

 PLC Setpoint 7
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10446 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.70 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 346

 PLC Setpoint 8
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10447 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.71 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 347

 PLC Setpoint 9
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10448 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.72 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 348

 PLC Setpoint 10
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10449 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.73 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 349

 PLC Setpoint 11
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10450 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.74 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 350

 PLC Setpoint 12
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10451 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.75 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 351

 PLC Setpoint 13
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10452 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.76 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 352

 PLC Setpoint 14
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10453 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.77 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 353

 PLC Setpoint 15
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10454 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.78 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 354

 PLC Setpoint 16
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10455 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.79 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 355

 PLC Setpoint 17
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10456 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.80 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 356

 PLC Setpoint 18
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10457 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.81 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 357

 PLC Setpoint 19
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10458 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.82 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 358

 PLC Setpoint 20
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10459 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.83 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 359

 PLC Setpoint 21
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10460 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.84 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 360

 PLC Setpoint 22
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10461 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.85 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 361

 PLC Setpoint 23
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10462 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.86 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 362

 PLC Setpoint 24
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10463 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.87 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 363

 PLC Setpoint 25
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10464 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.88 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 364

 PLC Setpoint 26
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10465 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.89 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 365

 PLC Setpoint 27
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10466 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.90 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 366

 PLC Setpoint 28
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10467 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.91 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 367

 PLC Setpoint 29
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10468 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.92 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 368

 PLC Setpoint 30
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10469 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.93 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 369

 PLC Setpoint 31
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10470 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.94 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 370

 PLC Setpoint 32
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10471 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.95 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 371

 PLC Setpoint 33
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10472 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.96 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 372

 PLC Setpoint 34
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10473 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.97 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 373

 PLC Setpoint 35
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10474 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.98 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 374

 PLC Setpoint 36
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10475 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.99 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 375

 PLC Setpoint 37
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10476 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.100 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 376

 PLC Setpoint 38
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10477 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.101 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 377

 PLC Setpoint 39
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10478 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.102 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 378

 PLC Setpoint 40
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10479 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.103 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 379

 PLC Setpoint 41
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10480 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.104 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 380

 PLC Setpoint 42
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10481 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.105 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 381

 PLC Setpoint 43
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10482 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.106 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 382

 PLC Setpoint 44
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10483 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.107 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 383

 PLC Setpoint 45
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10484 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.108 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 384

 PLC Setpoint 46
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10485 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.109 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 385

 PLC Setpoint 47
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10486 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.110 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 386

 PLC Setpoint 48
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10487 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.111 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 387

 PLC Setpoint 49
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10488 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.112 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 388

 PLC Setpoint 50
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10489 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.113 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 389

 PLC Setpoint 51
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10490 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.114 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 390

 PLC Setpoint 52
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10491 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.115 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 391

 PLC Setpoint 53
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10492 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.116 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 392

 PLC Setpoint 54
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10493 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.117 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 393

 PLC Setpoint 55
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10494 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.118 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 394

 PLC Setpoint 56
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10495 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.119 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 395

 PLC Setpoint 57
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10496 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.120 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 396

 PLC Setpoint 58
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10497 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.121 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 397

 PLC Setpoint 59
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10498 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.122 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 398

 PLC Setpoint 60
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10499 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.123 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 399

 PLC Setpoint 61
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10500 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.124 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 400

 PLC Setpoint 62
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10501 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.125 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 401

 PLC Setpoint 63
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10502 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.126 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 402

 PLC Setpoint 64
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10503 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool LiteEdit2015

Image 8.127 Screen of configuration from LiteEdit2015

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 403

8.1.2 Values
What values are:
Values (or quantities) are analog or binary data objects, measured or computed by the controller, that are
intended for reading from the controller screen, PC, MODBUS, etc. Values are organized into groups according
to their meaning.

Invalid flag
If valid data is not available for a particular value, the invalid flag is set to it. This situation may be due to the
following:
The value is not being evaluated in the scope of the current application and configuration.
Sensor fail has been detected on an analog input.
The configured ECU or extension module does not provide the particular value.
The communication with the ECU or extension module is interrupted.
A value containing the invalid flag is displayed as “####” in LiteEdit2015 and on the controller screen. If such a
value is read out via MODBUS, it will contain the data 32768 in the case of signed values and 65535 in the case
of unsigned values.

List of values groups

Group: Engine 407
Group: Generator 411
Group: Load 414
Group: Controler I/O 419
Group: Statistics 421
Group: IL Info 425
Group: Log Bout 427
Group: CM-GPRS 429
Group: CM-4G-GPS 434
Group: CM-Ethernet 440
Group: Date/Time 443
Group: Plug-In I/O 443
Group: PLC 444

For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of values (page 405).

InteliLite Global Guide 404

 List of values

Engine Load Characteristic 414 Num E-Stops 422

DEF Level 407 Load Characteristic L1 415 Num Starts 422

DPF Ash Load 407 Load Characteristic L2 415 Rental 1 422

DPF Soot Load 407 Load Characteristic L3 415 Rental 2 423

ECU-BIN 1 407 Load kVA 415 Running Hours 423

ECU-BIN 2 408 Load kVA L1 416 Shutdowns 423

ECU-BIN 3 408 Load kVA L2 416 Time Till Empty 423

ECU-BIN 4 408 Load kVA L3 416 Time Till Empty 424

ECU-BIN 5 408 Load kVAr 416 Time Till Empty 424

ECU-BIN 6 409 Load kVAr L1 417 Total Fuel Consumption 424

ECU-BIN 7 409 Load kVAr L2 417

Load kVAr L3 417 IL Info
ECU-BIN 8 409
Load kW 417 Application 425
ECU-BIN 9 409
Load kW L1 418 Breaker State 425
ECU-BIN-EXT-1 410
Load kW L2 418 Connection Type 425
ECU Frequency Select 410
Load kW L3 418 Engine State 425
ECU State 410
Load Power Factor 418 FW Branch 425
RPM 410
Load Power Factor L1 419 FW Version 426
Speed Request 411
Load Power Factor L2 419 ID String 426
Speed Required RPM 411
Load Power Factor L3 419 Password Decode 426

Generator SPI Module A 426

Generator Frequency 411

Controler I/O SPI Module B 426

Generator Voltage L1-L2 411 Analog Input 1 419 Timer Text 427

Generator Voltage L1-N 412 Analog Input 2 419 Timer Value 427

Generator Voltage L2-L3 412 Analog Input 3 420

Analog Input 4 420 Log Bout
Generator Voltage L2-N 412
BatteryVoltage 420 Log Bout 1 427
Generator Voltage L3-L1 412
Binary Inputs 420 Log Bout 2 427
Generator Voltage L3-N 412
Binary Outputs 420 Log Bout 3 428
Nominal Current 413
D+ 421 Log Bout 4 428
Nominal Power 413
Log Bout 5 428
Nominal Voltage 413
Statistics Log Bout 6 428
Earth Fault Current 413
Genset kWArh 421 Log Bout 7 428

Load Genset kWh 421 Log Bout 8 429

Load A L1 414 Maintenance 1 421 Log Bout 9 429

Load A L2 414 Maintenance 2 422

Load A L3 414 Maintenance 3 422

InteliLite Global Guide 405

 Date/Time Current DNS 441

Time 443 ETH Interface Status 441

Date 443 Current Gateway 441

Current IP Address 441
Plug-In I/O Last Email Result 442

EM BIO A 443 MAC Address 442

EM BIO B 444 Current Subnet Mask 443

CM-GPRS ; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
AirGate Status 429
AirGate ID 430
Connection Type 430
Cell Diag Code 430
Cell ErrorRate 432
Cell Signal Lev 432
Cell Status 432
Last Email Result 433
Operator 434
AirGate ID 435
AirGate Status 436
Connection Type 436
Cell Diag Code 436
Cell ErrorRate 438
Cell Signal Lev 438
Cell Status 438
Last Email Result 439
Operator 440

CM-4G-GPS (GPS part)

Altitude 434
HomePosDist 434
Latitude 434
Longitude 435
Satellites 435

CM-Ethernet
AirGate Status 440
AirGate ID 440

InteliLite Global Guide 406

 Group: Engine
DEF Level
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units %
Comm object 14522 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The level of diesel exhaust fluid tank.

6 back to List of values

DPF Ash Load

Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units %
Comm object 12483 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The rate of ash in DPF (Diesel particulate filter).

6 back to List of values

DPF Soot Load

Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units %
Comm object 12484 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The rate of soot in DPF (Diesel particulate filter).

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 1
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10153 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 407

 ECU-BIN 2
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10154 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 3
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10155 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 4
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10156 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 5
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10157 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 408

 ECU-BIN 6
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10158 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 7
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10159 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 8
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10160 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 9
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10161 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 409

 ECU-BIN-EXT-1
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10173 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU Frequency Select

Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units -
Comm object 12926 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Shows selected frequency of ECU.

6 back to List of values

ECU State
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units -
Comm object 10034 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Shows binary status (0 or 1) of ECU:
ECU Yellow Lamp
ECU Red Lamp
Wait To Start

6 back to List of values

RPM
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units RPM
Comm object 10123 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains the current engine speed. The value is obtained from one of the following sources:
ECU, if an ECU is configured
Pickup input
Generator frequency

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 410

 Speed Request
Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units %
Comm object 10137 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Engine speed control via CAN bus.

Speed request Requested speed Accelerator pedal position

0% 1350 RPM 0%
50% 1500 RPM 50%
100% 1650 RPM 100%

6 back to List of values

Speed Required RPM

Value group Engine Related FW 1.2.1
Units RPM
Comm object 10006 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Requested engine speed.

6 back to List of values

Group: Generator
Generator Frequency
Value group Generator Related FW 1.2.1
Units Hz
Comm object 8210 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Frequency of generator.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L1-L2

Value group Generator Related FW 1.2.1
Units V
Comm object 9628 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 411

 Generator Voltage L1-N
Value group Generator Related FW 1.2.1
Units V
Comm object 8192 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator voltage on phase 1.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L2-L3

Value group Generator Related FW 1.2.1
Units V
Comm object 9629 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L2 and L3 phases.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L2-N

Value group Generator Related FW 1.2.1
Units V
Comm object 8193 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator voltage on phase 2.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L3-L1

Value group Generator Related FW 1.2.1
Units V
Comm object 9630 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L3 and L1 phases.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L3-N

Value group Generator Related FW 1.2.1
Units V
Comm object 8194 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator voltage on phase 3.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 412

 Nominal Current
Value group Generator Related FW 1.2.1
Units A
Comm object 9978 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator nominal current.

6 back to List of values

Nominal Power
Value group Generator Related FW 1.2.1
Units V
Comm object 9018 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator nominal power.

6 back to List of values

Nominal Voltage
Value group Generator Related FW 1.2.1
Units V
Comm object 9917 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator nominal voltage.

6 back to List of values

Earth Fault Current

Value group Generator Related FW 1.2.1
Units A
Comm object 14325 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Measured value of fault for evaluation of earth fault protection.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 413

 Group: Load
Load A L1
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units A
Comm object 8198 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load current phase L1.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load A L2
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units A
Comm object 8199 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load current phase L2.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load A L3
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units A
Comm object 8200 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load current phase L3.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load Characteristic
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8395 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Character of the load. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is resistive load (power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 414

 Load Characteristic L1
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8626 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Character of the generator load in the L1 phase. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is
resistive load (power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

Load Characteristic L2
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8627 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Character of the generator load in the L2 phase. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is
resistive load (power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

Load Characteristic L3
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8628 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Character of the generator load in the L3 phase. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is
resistive load (power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

Load kVA
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units kVA
Comm object 8565 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load apparent power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 415

 Load kVA L1
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units kVA
Comm object 8530 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load apparent power L1.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kVA L2
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units kVA
Comm object 8531 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load apparent power L2.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kVA L3
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units kVA
Comm object 8532 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load apparent power L3.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kVAr
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units kVAr
Comm object 8203 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load reactive power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 416

 Load kVAr L1
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units kVAr
Comm object 8527 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load reactive power in phase L1.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kVAr L2
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units kVAr
Comm object 8528 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load reactive power in phase L2.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kVAr L3
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units kVAr
Comm object 8529 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load reactive power in phase L3.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kW
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units kW
Comm object 8202 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load active power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 417

 Load kW L1
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units kW
Comm object 8524 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load active power in phase L1.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kW L2
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units kW
Comm object 8525 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load active power in phase L2.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kW L3
Value group Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units kW
Comm object 8526 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load active power in phase L3.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load Power Factor

Load Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8204 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator power factor.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 418

 Load Power Factor L1
Load Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8533 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator power factor in phase L1.

6 back to List of values

Load Power Factor L2

Load Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8534 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator power factor in phase L2.

6 back to List of values

Load Power Factor L3

Load Load Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8535 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator power factor in phase L3.

6 back to List of values

Group: Controler I/O

Analog Input 1
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.2.1
Units Configurable
Comm object 9151 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is the value of the analog input 1 of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Analog Input 2
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.2.1
Units Configurable
Comm object 9152 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is the value of the analog input 2 of the controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 419

 Analog Input 3
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.2.1
Units Configurable
Comm object 9153 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is the value of the analog input 3 of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Analog Input 4
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.2.1
Units Configurable
Comm object 9154 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is the value of the analog input 4 of the controller.

6 back to List of values

BatteryVoltage
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.2.1
Units V
Comm object 8213 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Controller supply voltage.

6 back to List of values

Binary Inputs
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8235 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of the binary inputs of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Binary Outputs
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8239 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of the binary outputs of the controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 420

 D+
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.2.1
Units V
Comm object 10603 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
D+ terminal voltage.

6 back to List of values

Group: Statistics
Genset kWArh
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units kWArh
Comm object 8539 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Counter of gen-set reactive power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Genset kWh
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units kWh
Comm object 8205 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Counter of gen-set active power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via LiteEdit2015 PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Maintenance 1
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units hours
Comm object 10528 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 1. Initial value can be set in Maintenance Timer 1 (page 188).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 421

 Maintenance 2
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units hours
Comm object 10529 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 2. Initial value can be set in Maintenance Timer 2 (page 189).

6 back to List of values

Maintenance 3
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units hours
Comm object 10530 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 3. Initial value can be set in Maintenance Timer 3 (page 189).

6 back to List of values

Num E-Stops
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 11195 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Emergency stop alarms counter.

6 back to List of values

Num Starts
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8207 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Engine start commands counter. The counter is increased by 1 even if the particular start command will take
more than one attempt.

6 back to List of values

Rental 1
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units hours
Comm object 14328 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Remaining hours of Rental Timer 1 (page 278).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 422

 Rental 2
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units days
Comm object 14369 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Remaining hours of Rental Timer 2 (page 280).

6 back to List of values

Running Hours
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units hours
Comm object 8206 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Engine operation hours counter. The engine hours are incremented in the controller while the engine is
running.
Note: If an ECU is configured and it provides engine hours value, the value is taken from the ECU.

6 back to List of values

Shutdowns
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 11196 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Shutdown alarms counter. This counter counts all occurrences of a shutdown alarm, not only real shutdowns
of the gen-set, i.e. the counter is increased by 2 if two shutdown alarms appear simultaneously.

6 back to List of values

Time Till Empty

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units days
Comm object 13770 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Assessment in days when the fuel tank will be empty.
Note: This value is based on setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 185) and value from ECU Fuel Rate. For
correct calculation of this value is necessary to have configured ECU which send Fuel Rate value,
otherwise this value can’t be calculated.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 423

 Time Till Empty
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units hours
Comm object 13771 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Assessment in hours when the fuel tank will be empty.
Note: This value is based on setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 185) and value from ECU Fuel Rate. For
correct calculation of this value is necessary to have configured ECU which send Fuel Rate value,
otherwise this value can’t be calculated.

6 back to List of values

Time Till Empty

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units minutes
Comm object 13772 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Assessment in minutes when the fuel tank will be empty.
Note: This value is based on setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 185) and value from ECU Fuel Rate. For
correct calculation of this value is necessary to have configured ECU which send Fuel Rate value,
otherwise this value can’t be calculated.

6 back to List of values

Total Fuel Consumption

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.2.1
Units L
Comm object 9040 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Value containing total amount of consumed fuel by engine. The controller automatically updates this value
every 30 s. The controller can calculate it in three ways:
Direct reading from ECU
Calculation based on actual fuel consumption reading from ECU
Calculation from fuel level drop in tank (using Fuel Level Analog Input + Fuel Tank Volume (page 185)
setpoint)
Note: The accuracy of Total Fuel Consumption depends on the precision of ECU values or precision of
Fuel Tank Volume (page 185) and fuel level sensor.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 424

 Group: IL Info
Application
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8480 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains actual application in controller.

6 back to List of values

Breaker State
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 9245 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains actual “breaker state” message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Connection Type
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 12944 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The text of this value represents the connection type which is adjusted in setpoint Connection type (page
157).

6 back to List of values

Engine State
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 9244 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains actual “engine state” message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

6 back to List of values

FW Branch
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 8707 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains actual branch of firmware in controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 425

 FW Version
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 24339 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Major and minor firmware version number.

6 back to List of values

ID String
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 24501 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Name of controller which is used in LiteEdit2015 in command bar.

6 back to List of values

Password Decode
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 24202 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains a number which can be used for retrieving a lost password. Send this number together
with the controller serial number to your distributor if you have lost your password.

6 back to List of values

SPI Module A
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 14447 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The name of plug-in module which is inserted in slot B.

6 back to List of values

SPI Module B
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 14448 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The name of plug-in module which is inserted in slot B.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 426

 Timer Text
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10040 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains the numeric code of the “Current process timer” text which is shown on the main screen
of the controller.
The assignment of texts to the codes can be obtained using LiteEdit2015. Open any connection (also offline
with a previously saved archive) and go to the Tools ribbon -> Generate CFG image (all). The resulting file
will contain the assignment of texts to the codes.

6 back to List of values

Timer Value
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.2.1
Units [HH:MM:SS]
Comm object 14147 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains the "Current process timer" value which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Group: Log Bout

Log Bout 1
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 9143 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 2
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 9144 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 427

 Log Bout 3
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 9145 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 4
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 9146 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 5
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 9147 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 6
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 9148 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 7
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 9149 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 428

 Log Bout 8
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 9150 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 9
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 11896 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Group: CM-GPRS
AirGate Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24308 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.

Code Description
0 SIM card is not inserted
1 Controller registered, waiting for authorization
2 Not possible to register, controller blacklisted
3 Not possible to register, server has no more capacity
4 Not possible to register, other reason
5 Controller registered and authorized

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 429

 AirGate ID
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24309 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
LiteEdit2015 or any other supported PC tool.

6 back to List of values

Connection Type
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24146 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The type of data connection.

6 back to List of values

Cell Diag Code

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24288 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Diagnostic code for the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS module.

GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 Modul is switched off
3 Module is switched on
4 Module – error in initialization
5 Module – not possible to set the APN
6 Module – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 Module – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 Module – not accepted DNS IP address
9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
11 SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or

InteliLite Global Guide 430

 unknown status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by
14
locked SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected
19 No CDMA network
20 Unsuccessful registration to CDMA network
21 SIMCom/ME909s: can´t read FW version
22 SIMCom: GSM signal not found
23 SIMCom: can´t detect module speed
24 SIMCom: HW reset issued
25 PUK is required
26 Error of SIM card detected
27 ME909s: can't set module bps
28 ME909s: can't set link configuration
29 ME909s: can't do power-off
30 ME909s: can't do power-on
31 ME909s: can't do hardware reset
32 ME909s: ME909s not started
33 ME909s: switch off issued
34 ME909s: switch on issued
35 ME909s: HW reset issued
36 ME909s: can't switch echo off
37 ME909s: can't find out state of registration
38 ME909s: GSM signal not found
39 ME909s: no SIM memory for SMS
40 ME909s: waiting for registration
41 Can't read operator name
42 ME909s: can't set flow control
43 APN not typed
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 431

 Cell ErrorRate
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Comm object 24300 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains information about relative quality of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS module
or by CM-4G-GPS module. The lower value means higher quality of signal.

6 back to List of values

Cell Signal Lev

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Comm object 24302 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains information about relative strength of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS
module or by CM-4G-GPS module. It is a relative value helping to find the best signal and for troubleshooting
cases.

6 back to List of values

Cell Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24290 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the GSM modem.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 432

 Last Email Result
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24307 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.

Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
4 Maximum length of data can’t be read.
5 No appeal to send command.
6 Command can’t be send.
7 Command can’t be send.
8 HELO command was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
18 SMTP server refused the data of email.
19 SMTP server refused the data of email.
20 QUIT command was refused.
21 Lost of connection.
23 Error during closing the connection.
24 No answer from server.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
28 Error of encoding.
29 There was no attempt to send email.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 433

 Operator
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24147 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The name of operator which to SIM card is connected.
Note: If roaming service is used then prefix "R" is added before the name of operator.

6 back to List of values

Group: CM-4G-GPS
Altitude
CM-4G-GPS (GPS
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
part)
Units m
Comm object 24266 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Actual GPS altitude.

6 back to List of values

HomePosDist
CM-4G-GPS (GPS
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
part)
Units km
Comm object 11680 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Actual distance from home position. Home position is adjusted via setpoints Home Latitude (page 283) and
Home Longitude (page 283) or by binary input GEO HOME POSITION (PAGE 455).

6 back to List of values

Latitude
CM-4G-GPS (GPS
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24268 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Actual GPS latitude. Positions on north hemisphere have positive value, position on south hemisphere have
negative value.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 434

 Longitude
CM-4G-GPS (GPS
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24267 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Actual GPS longitude. Positions on east hemisphere have positive value, position on west hemisphere have
negative value.

6 back to List of values

Satellites
CM-4G-GPS (GPS
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24265 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Number of available satellites for GPS location.

6 back to List of values

AirGate ID
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24309 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
LiteEdit2015 or any other supported PC tool.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 435

 AirGate Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24308 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.

Code Description
0 SIM card is not inserted
1 Controller registered, waiting for authorization
2 Not possible to register, controller blacklisted
3 Not possible to register, server has no more capacity
4 Not possible to register, other reason
5 Controller registered and authorized

6 back to List of values

Connection Type
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24146 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The type of data connection.

6 back to List of values

Cell Diag Code

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24288 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Diagnostic code for the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS module.

GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 Modul is switched off
3 Module is switched on

InteliLite Global Guide 436

 4 Module – error in initialization
5 Module – not possible to set the APN
6 Module – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 Module – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 Module – not accepted DNS IP address
9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or
11
unknown status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by
14
locked SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected
19 No CDMA network
20 Unsuccessful registration to CDMA network
21 SIMCom/ME909s: can´t read FW version
22 SIMCom: GSM signal not found
23 SIMCom: can´t detect module speed
24 SIMCom: HW reset issued
25 PUK is required
26 Error of SIM card detected
27 ME909s: can't set module bps
28 ME909s: can't set link configuration
29 ME909s: can't do power-off
30 ME909s: can't do power-on
31 ME909s: can't do hardware reset
32 ME909s: ME909s not started
33 ME909s: switch off issued
34 ME909s: switch on issued
35 ME909s: HW reset issued
36 ME909s: can't switch echo off
37 ME909s: can't find out state of registration
38 ME909s: GSM signal not found
39 ME909s: no SIM memory for SMS
40 ME909s: waiting for registration

InteliLite Global Guide 437

 41 Can't read operator name
42 ME909s: can't set flow control
43 APN not typed
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate

6 back to List of values

Cell ErrorRate
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Comm object 24300 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains information about relative quality of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS module
or by CM-4G-GPS module. The lower value means higher quality of signal.

6 back to List of values

Cell Signal Lev

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Comm object 24302 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains information about relative strength of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS
module or by CM-4G-GPS module. It is a relative value helping to find the best signal and for troubleshooting
cases.

6 back to List of values

Cell Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24290 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the GSM modem.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 438

 Last Email Result
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24307 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.

Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
4 Maximum length of data can’t be read.
5 No appeal to send command.
6 Command can’t be send.
7 Command can’t be send.
8 HELO command was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
18 SMTP server refused the data of email.
19 SMTP server refused the data of email.
20 QUIT command was refused.
21 Lost of connection.
23 Error during closing the connection.
24 No answer from server.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
28 Error of encoding.
29 There was no attempt to send email.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 439

 Operator
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.2.1
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24147 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The name of operator which to SIM card is connected.
Note: If roaming service is used then prefix "R" is added before the name of operator.

6 back to List of values

Group: CM-Ethernet
AirGate Status
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 24344 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.

Code Description
0 Ethernet cable is disconected
1 Controller registered, waiting for authorization
2 Not possible to register, controller blacklisted
3 Not possible to register, server has no more capacity
4 Not possible to register, other reason
5 Controller registered and authorized

6 back to List of values

AirGate ID
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 24345 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
LiteEdit2015 or any other supported PC tool.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 440

 Current DNS
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 24181 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current domain name server.

6 back to List of values

ETH Interface Status

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 24180 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current status of ethernet communication.

6 back to List of values

Current Gateway
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 24182 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current gateway address.

6 back to List of values

Current IP Address
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 24184 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current IP address of the controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 441

 Last Email Result
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 24332 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.

Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
8 HELO command was refused.
9 EHLO commnad was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
20 QUIT command was refused.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
27 Email address can’t be read.
30 SMTP server address translation error (from DNS server).
31 Error reading email content data (24327).

6 back to List of values

MAC Address
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 24333 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current MAC address of the controller ethernet interface.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 442

 Current Subnet Mask
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 24183 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current subnet mask.

6 back to List of values

Group: Date/Time
Time
Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.2.1
Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 24554 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Shows setup time.

6 back to List of values

Date
Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.2.1
Units DD.MM.YYYY
Comm object 24553 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Shows setup date.

6 back to List of values

Group: Plug-In I/O

EM BIO A
Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 14291 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot A.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 443

 EM BIO B
Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 14292 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot B.

6 back to List of values

Group: PLC
PLC Resource 1
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10504 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 2
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10505 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 3
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10506 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 4
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10507 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 444

 PLC Resource 5
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10508 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 6
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10509 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 7
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10510 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 8
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10511 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 1
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10424 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 445

 PLC-BOUT 2
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10425 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 3
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10426 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 4
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10427 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 5
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10428 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 6
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10429 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 446

 PLC-BOUT 7
Value group PLC Related FW 1.2.1
Units [-]
Comm object 10430 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 447

8.1.3 Logical binary inputs
What Logical binary inputs are:
Logical binary inputs are inputs for binary values and functions.

Alphabetical groups of Logical binary inputs

LBI: A 450
LBI: B 450
LBI: C 451
LBI: E 452
LBI: F 453
LBI: G 454
LBI: H 456
LBI: I 456
LBI: L 457
LBI: N 458
LBI: O 458
LBI: R 459
LBI: S 461

For full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary inputs alphabetically (page 449).

InteliLite Global Guide 448

 Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Access Lock 450

Configuration 2 450
Configuration 3 450
Battery Charge 450
BIN Protection 1..48 451
Coolant Temp 451
ECU Speed Down 452
ECU Speed Up 452
Emergency MAN 452
Emergency Stop 453
Fault Reset Button 453
Force Regeneration 453
Fuel Level 454
Fuel Pump On/Off 454
GCB Button 454
GCB Feedback 455
Geo Home Position 455
Geo-Fencing Enabled 456
Horn Reset Button 456
Idle Speed 456
Lang Selection 1 457
Lang Selection 2 457
Lang Selection 3 458
Not Used 458
Oil Pressure 458
Regeneration Inhib 459
Remote AUTO 459
Remote Ctrl Lock 459
Remote MAN 460
Remote OFF 460
Remote Start/Stop 460
Sd Override 461
Start Button 461
Stop Button 461

InteliLite Global Guide 449

 LBI: A
Access Lock
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1
Description
When this input is closed, no setpoints can be adjusted from controller’s front panel and gen-set mode (OFF /
MAN / AUTO / TEST) cannot be changed.
Note: Access Lock does not protect setpoints and mode changing from LiteEdit2015. To avoid
unqualified changes the selected setpoints have to be password protected.
Also the buttons Fault Reset and Horn Reset are not blocked at all and buttons Start and Stop
in MAN mode are not blocked.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Configuration 2
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 859
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the second set (setpoints with number 2).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Configuration 3
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 860
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the third set (setpoints with number 3).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: B
Battery Charge
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 623
Description
When binary input is active and his delay Battery Charge Fail Delay (page 189) is out of time than alarm
Battery Charge Fail (page 564) is activated, written into history log and logical binary output AL BATTERY
CHARGE (PAGE 467) is activated.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 450

 BIN Protection 1..48
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9999
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: C
Coolant Temp
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 625
Description
Binary input for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543) protection.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 451

 LBI: E
ECU Speed Down
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 164
Description
This binary input is used to set the setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 193) by binary inputs. When the LBI
is activated the setpoint is decreased by 2%.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Speed Up
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 165
Description
This binary input is used to set the setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 193) by binary inputs. When the LBI
is activated the setpoint is increase by 2%.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Emergency MAN
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 45
Description
This input is designed to allow the gen-set to be controlled externally, not by the controller. This feature can
be useful in case of testing the gen-set or in case of some failure, which disables the gen-set to be controlled
by the controller, but the gen-set itself is operational.
The controller behaves in the following way:
Shows the text EmergMan in the engine status on the main screen.
Stops all functions regarding the gen-set control, deactivates all outputs related to it.
Stop Fail alarm is not being evaluated and stop solenoid is not activated if nonzero speed is detected.
When the input is deactivated, the controller takes control over the gen-set according to the situation
the gen-set was in the moment of deactivation, i.e. the gen-set remains running loaded if it was
running and GCB was closed in the moment the input was deactivated.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 452

 Emergency Stop
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 40
Description
The shutdown procedure will start immediately when this input is activated. Input is inverted (NC = normaly
closed) in default configuration.
Note: In case of controller hardware or software fail, safe stop of the engine doesn’t have to be ensured.
To back-up the Emergency Stop function it is recommended to connect separate circuit for
disconnection of Fuel Solenoid and Starter signals.

For more detail see chapter Emergency stop (page 33) recommended wiring.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: F
Fault Reset Button
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 191
Description

Binary input has the same function as Fault Reset button on the InteliLite front panel.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Force Regeneration
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 680
Description
When this binary input is activated, the controller send request for force regeneration of DPF (diesel
particulate filter) to ECU.
Note: ECU with Tier IV support is required for proper functionality.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 453

 Fuel Level
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 626
Description
Binary input for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 544) protection.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Fuel Pump On/Off

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 694
Description
This binary input is used for manual control of binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493).
Note: This binary input is basically designed for ON and OFF switch (switch with arrestment in these
positions) because controller reacts to rising and falling edge of signal in this input.

IMPORTANT: When binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 454) is configured then binary
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) is control by this binary input. Setpoints Fuel Pump On (page 186)
and Fuel Pump Off (page 187) are not evaluated!

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: G
GCB Button
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 193
Description

Binary input has the same function as GCB button on the InteliLite front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 454

 GCB Feedback
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 63
Description
Use this input for indication whether the generator circuit breaker is open or closed.

Image 8.128 GCB Feedback 1

Image 8.129 GCB Feedback 2

Note: InteliLite controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Geo Home Position

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 219
Description
This binary input can be used to adjust home position of gen-set. In case that binary input is active, setpoints
Home Latitude (page 283) and Home Longitude (page 283) are adjusted automatically from actual coordinates
from GPS signal.
Note: Input has to be activated for at least 2 seconds.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 455

 Geo-Fencing Enabled
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 218
Description
This binary input enables or disables Fence 1 Protection (page 286) and Fence 2 Protection (page 287) if Geo-
Fencing (page 285) is adjusted to value "LBI Enable".

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: H
Horn Reset Button
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 192
Description

Binary input has the same function as Horn reset button on the InteliLite front panel.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: I
Idle Speed
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 624
Description
This binary input changes cooling speed from nominal to idle.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 456

 LBI: L
Lang Selection 1
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 107
Description
Use this binary input with binary input LANG SELECTION 2 (PAGE 457) and LANG SELECTION 3 (PAGE 458) to
choose required language of controller. The system is based on binary numbers.

Binary input Binary number Active language

Language Selection 1 is active 1 First language (English)
LANG SELECTION 2 (PAGE 457) is active 2 Second language
Language Selection 1 and LANG SELECTION
3 Third language
2 (PAGE 457) are active
LANG SELECTION 3 (PAGE 458) is active 4 Fourth language
Language Selection 1 and LANG SELECTION
5 Fifth language
3 (PAGE 458) are active

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Lang Selection 2
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 108
Description
Use this binary input with binary input LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 457) and LANG SELECTION 3 (PAGE 458) to
choose required language of controller. The system is based on binary numbers.

Binary input Binary number Active language

LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 457) is active 1 First language (English)
Lang Selection 2 is active 2 Second language
LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 457) and Lang
3 Third language
Selection 2 are active
LANG SELECTION 3 (PAGE 458) is active 4 Fourth language
LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 457) and LANG
5 Fifth language
SELECTION 3 (PAGE 458) are active

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 457

 Lang Selection 3
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 109
Description
Use this binary input with binary input LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 457) and LANG SELECTION 2 (PAGE 457) to
choose required language of controller. The system is based on binary numbers.

Binary input Binary number Active language

Language Selection 1 is active 1 First language (English)
LANG SELECTION 2 (PAGE 457) is active 2 Second language
Language Selection 1 and LANG SELECTION
3 Third language
2 (PAGE 457) are active
Lang Selection 3 (page 1) is active 4 Fourth language
LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 457) and Lang
5 Fifth language
Selection 3 (page 1) are active

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: N
Not Used
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 184
Description
Binary input has no function. Use this configuration when binary input is not used.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: O
Oil Pressure
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 43
Description
Binary input for Oil Pressure (page 1) protection.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 458

 LBI: R
Regeneration Inhib
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 679
Description
When this binary input is activated, the controller sends request to inhibit regeneration of DPF (diesel
particulate filter) to ECU.
Note: ECU with Tier IV support is required for proper functionality.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote AUTO
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 620
Description
The controller is switched to the AUTO mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
binary input is closed. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
This binary input has the lowest priority from Remote OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST binary inputs

Remote control priority

Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote Ctrl Lock
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 4
Description
If the input is active, the controller will not accept any actions regarding the gen-set control – e.g. writing of
commands and setpoint changes via remote communication interfaces.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 459

 Remote MAN
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 618
Description
The controller is switched to the MAN mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
binary input is closed. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.

Remote control priority

Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote OFF
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 617
Description
The controller is switched to the OFF mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
binary input is closed. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.

Remote control priority

Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote Start/Stop
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 38
Description
Use this input to start and stop the gen-set in AUTO mode.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 460

 LBI: S
Sd Override
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 44
Description
If this input is active, all alarms except Emergency Stop and Overspeed are suppressed. The suppressed
alarms will be displayed in the alarm list, but they will not take effect regarding the gen-set control.
Note: Sd Override (page 461) is indicated in the alarm list if Sd Override mode is active to inform the
operator that the engine is not protected.

IMPORTANT: MISUSE OF THIS INPUT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE GEN-SET!

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Start Button
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 189
Description

Binary input has the same function as Start Button on the InteliLite front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Stop Button
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 190
Description

Binary input has the same function as Stop Button on the InteliLite front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
Mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 461

8.1.4 Logical binary outputs
What Logical binary outputs are:
Logical binary outputs are outputs for binary values and functions.

Alphabetical groups of Logical binary outputs

LBO: A 465
LBO: B 486
LBO: C 490
LBO: E 490
LBO: F 493
LBO: G 495
LBO: H 502
LBO: I 503
LBO: M 505
LBO: N 505
LBO: P 506
LBO: R 508
LBO: S 509
LBO: T 513

For full list of Logical binary outputs go to the chapter Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463).

InteliLite Global Guide 462

 Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Air Valves 465 AL Oil Press Wrn 473 BIN 7 Status 489
AL AIN 1 Sd+BOC 465 AL Overcurrent 473 Cooling Pump 490
AL AIN 1 Wrn 465 AL Overload BOC 473 Cooling 490
AL AIN 2 Sd+BOC 466 AL Overload Wrn 473 ECU Communic Error 490
AL AIN 2 Wrn 466 AL Overspeed 474 ECU Communic OK 491
AL AIN 3 Sd+BOC 466 AL Rental Timer 1 474 ECU Power Relay 491
AL AIN 3 Wrn 466 AL Rental Timer 2 475 ECU Red Lamp 491
AL AIN 4 Sd+BOC 466 AL Start Fail 475 ECU Run Stop 492
AL AIN 4 Wrn 467 AL Stop Fail 475 ECU Yellow Lamp 492
AL Battery Flat 467 AL Underspeed 475 Exercise Timer 1 492
AL Battery Charge 467 Alarm 476 Exercise Timer 2 492
AL Battery Voltage 467 Analog Switch 1 476 Fault Reset 493
AL Common BOC 467 Analog Switch 2 477 Fuel Pump 493
AL Common Fls 468 Analog Switch 3 477 Fuel Solenoid 493
AL Common Sd 468 Analog Switch 4 478 GCB Close/Open 495
AL Common Wrn 468 Analog Switch 5 478 GCB OFF Coil 497
AL CoolantTemp Low 468 Analog Switch 6 479 GCB ON Coil 498
AL CoolantTemp Sd 469 Analog Switch 7 479 GCB UV Coil 498
AL CoolantTemp Wrn 469 Analog Switch 8 480 Generator Healthy 500
AL D+ Fail 469 Analog Switch 9 480 Glow Plugs 500
AL Earth Fault 469 Analog Switch 10 481 Heartbeat 502
AL Fence 1 470 Analog Switch 11 481 HEST Lamp 502
AL Fence 2 470 Analog Switch 12 482 Horn 502
AL Fuel Level Sd 470 Analog Switch 13 482 Idle/Nominal 503
AL Fuel Level Wrn 470 Analog Switch 14 483 Ignition 503
AL Gen Freq Wrn 470 Analog Switch 15 483 Ignition On 504
AL Gen Frequency 471 Analog Switch 16 484 Manual Ready 505
AL Gen > Frequency 471 Analog Switch 17 484 Mode AUTO 505
AL Gen > Voltage 471 Analog Switch 18 485 Mode MAN 505
AL Gen < Frequency 471 Analog Switch 19 485 Mode OFF 505
AL Gen < Voltage 471 Analog Switch 20 486 Not Used 505
AL Gen Voltage Wrn 472 BIN 1 Status 486 Power Switch 506
AL Gen Voltage 472 BIN 2 Status 487 Prestart 506
AL Maintenance 1 472 BIN 3 Status 487 Ready To Load 508
AL Maintenance 2 472 BIN 4 Status 488 Ready 508
AL Maintenance 3 472 BIN 5 Status 488 RegenerationNeeded 508
AL Oil Press Sd 473 BIN 6 Status 489 Running 509

InteliLite Global Guide 463

 Sd Override 509
Starter 510
Still Log 0 510
Still Log 1 510
Stop Pulse 511
Stop Solenoid 511
Supplying Load 512
Temperature Switch 513

InteliLite Global Guide 464

 LBO: A
Air Valves
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1247
Description
This output closes together with binary output PRESTART (PAGE 506) and opens after the engine is stopped
or in case that engine is not ready.

Image 8.130 Air Valves

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL AIN 1 Sd+BOC
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1386
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the analog input 1 of the controller
present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL AIN 1 Wrn
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1382
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the analog input 1 of the controller present in the
alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 465

 AL AIN 2 Sd+BOC
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1387
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the analog input 2 of the controller
present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL AIN 2 Wrn
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1383
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the analog input 2 of the controller present in the
alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL AIN 3 Sd+BOC
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1388
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the analog input 3 of the controller
present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL AIN 3 Wrn
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1384
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the analog input 3 of the controller present in the
alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL AIN 4 Sd+BOC
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1389
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the analog input 4 of the controller
present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 466

 AL AIN 4 Wrn
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1385
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the analog input 4 of the controller present in the
alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Battery Flat
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1292
Description
This output is active when the Sd Battery Flat (page 584) or Wrn Battery Voltage (page 567) alarm is
present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Battery Charge
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1272
Description
This output is active when the Battery Charge Fail (page 564) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Battery Voltage
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1293
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Battery Voltage (page 567) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common BOC
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9
Description
Output closes when any BOC alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No BOC alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 467

 AL Common Fls
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 6
Description
Output closes when any sensor fail alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No sensor fail alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common Sd
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 4
Description
Output closes when any shutdown alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No shutdown alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common Wrn
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 3
Description
Output closes when any warning alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No warning alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL CoolantTemp Low
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1295
Description
The output is closed when there is the Wrn Coolant Temperature Low (page 567) alarm from the
COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543) in the alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

InteliLite Global Guide 468

 AL CoolantTemp Sd
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1421
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543) in the
alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

AL CoolantTemp Wrn
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1420
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 543) in the alarmlist or
isn’t confirmed.
Note: Binary output is also active if protection type is set to HistRecOnl and threshold level for history
record is reach.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL D+ Fail
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1260
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Charging Alternator Fail (page 567) alarm is present in the alarmlist or
isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Earth Fault
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1294
Description
This output is active when the Sd Earth Fault Current (page 585) alarm is present in alarm list or isn’t
confirm.
Note: It is strongly recommended to use this output only onetime.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 469

 AL Fence 1
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1548
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Fence 1 Alarm (page 568) or BOC Fence 1 Alarm (page 594) or Sd
Fence 1 Alarm (page 585) (depends on configuration of alarm type) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Fence 2
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1549
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Fence 2 Alarm (page 568) or BOC Fence 2 Alarm (page 594) or Sd
Fence 2 Alarm (page 585) (depends on configuration of alarm type) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Fuel Level Sd
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1423
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 544) in the
alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Fuel Level Wrn

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1422
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 544) in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirmed.
Note: Binary output is also active if protection type is set to HistRecOnl and threshold level for history
record is reach.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Freq Wrn

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1267
Description
This output is active generator frequency warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 470

 AL Gen Frequency
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1266
Description
This output is active when at least one generator frequency BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen > Frequency

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1264
Description
This output is active when at least one generator overfrequency alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen > Voltage

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1261
Description
This output is active when at least one generator overvoltage alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen < Frequency

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1265
Description
This output is active when at least one generator underfrequency alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen < Voltage

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1262
Description
This output is active when at least one generator undervoltage alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 471

 AL Gen Voltage Wrn
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1289
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Voltage
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1263
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Maintenance 1
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1254
Description
This output is active when the Alarm Maintenance 1 is present in the alarmlist. It means that counter of
maintenance is on zero or the Alarm Maintenance 1 isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Maintenance 2
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1255
Description
This output is active when the Alarm Maintenance 2 is present in the alarmlist. It means that counter of
maintenance is on zero or the Alarm Maintenance 2 isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Maintenance 3
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1256
Description
This output is active when the Alarm Maintenance 3 is present in the alarmlist. It means that counter of
maintenance is on zero or the Alarm Maintenance 3 isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 472

 AL Oil Press Sd
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1419
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown alarm from the OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 546) in the alarmlist or
isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Oil Press Wrn

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1418
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 546) in the alarmlist or
isn’t confirmed.
Note: Binary output is also active if protection type is set to HistRecOnl and threshold level for history
record is reach.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Overcurrent
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 109
Description
This output is active when the BOC Overcurrent IDMT (page 598) alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Overload BOC
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1268
Description
This output is active when the Sd Overload (page 592) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Overload Wrn
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1269
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Overload (page 575) alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 473

 AL Overspeed
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 779
Description
This output is active when the Sd Overspeed (page 592) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Rental Timer 1
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1370
Description
The binary output closes when the Rental Timer 1 (page 278) elapsed.

Image 8.131 Rental Timer 1

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 474

 AL Rental Timer 2
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1371
Description
The binary output closes when the Rental Timer 2 (page 280) elapsed.

Image 8.132 Rental Timer 2

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Start Fail
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1291
Description
This output is active when the Sd Start Fail (page 593) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Stop Fail
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 339
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Stop Fail (page 576) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Underspeed
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1296
Description
This output is active when the Sd Underspeed (page 593) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 475

 Alarm
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2
Description
The output is designed to be used as external alarm indication such as a red bulb in the control room etc. The
output is active when at least one unconfirmed alarm is present in the alarmlist and remains active until
confirmation of alarm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Analog Switch 1
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1400
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 1 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 1 On (page 204) and Analog Switch 1 Off (page 205). The value is
measured from AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 536) analog input.

Image 8.133 General analog input 1 switch

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 476

 Analog Switch 2
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1401
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 2 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 2 On (page 207) and Analog Switch 2 Off (page 208). The value is
measured from AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 536) analog input.

Image 8.134 General analog input 2 switch

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Analog Switch 3
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1402
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 3 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 3 On (page 210) and Analog Switch 3 Off (page 211). The value is
measured from AIN SWITCH 03 (PAGE 536) analog input.

Image 8.135 General analog input 3 switch

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 477

 Analog Switch 4
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1403
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 4 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 4 On (page 213) and Analog Switch 4 Off (page 214). The value is
measured from AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.136 General analog input 4 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

Analog Switch 5
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1787
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 5 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 5 On (page 216) and Analog Switch 5 Off (page 217). The value is
measured from AIN SWITCH 05 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.137 General analog input 5 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

InteliLite Global Guide 478

 Analog Switch 6
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1788
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 6 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 6 On (page 219) and Analog Switch 6 Off (page 220). The value is
measured from AIN SWITCH 06 (PAGE 537) analog input.

Image 8.138 General analog input 6 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

Analog Switch 7
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1789
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 7 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 7 On (page 222) and Analog Switch 7 Off (page 223). The value is
measured from AIN SWITCH 07 (PAGE 538) analog input.

Image 8.139 General analog input 7 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

InteliLite Global Guide 479

 Analog Switch 8
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1790
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 8 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 8 On (page 225) and Analog Switch 8 Off (page 226). The value is
measured from AIN SWITCH 08 (PAGE 538) analog input.

Image 8.140 General analog input 8 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

Analog Switch 9
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1791
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 9 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 9 On (page 228) and Analog Switch 9 Off (page 229). The value is
measured from AIN SWITCH 09 (PAGE 538) analog input.

Image 8.141 General analog input 9 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

InteliLite Global Guide 480

 Analog Switch 10
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1792
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 10 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 10 On (page 231) and Analog Switch 10 Off (page 232). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 10 (PAGE 539) analog input.

Image 8.142 General analog input 10 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

Analog Switch 11
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1793
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 11 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 11 On (page 234) and Analog Switch 11 Off (page 235). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 11 (PAGE 539) analog input.

Image 8.143 General analog input 11 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

InteliLite Global Guide 481

 Analog Switch 12
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1794
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 12 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 12 On (page 237) and Analog Switch 12 Off (page 238). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 12 (PAGE 539) analog input.

Image 8.144 General analog input 12 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

Analog Switch 13
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1795
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 13 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 13 On (page 240) and Analog Switch 13 Off (page 241). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 13 (PAGE 540) analog input.

Image 8.145 General analog input 13 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

InteliLite Global Guide 482

 Analog Switch 14
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1796
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 14 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 14 On (page 243) and Analog Switch 14 Off (page 244). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 14 (PAGE 540) analog input.

Image 8.146 General analog input 14 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

Analog Switch 15
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1797
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 15 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 15 On (page 246) and Analog Switch 15 Off (page 247). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 15 (PAGE 540) analog input.

Image 8.147 General analog input 15 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

InteliLite Global Guide 483

 Analog Switch 16
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1798
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 16 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 16 On (page 249) and Analog Switch 16 Off (page 250). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 16 (PAGE 541) analog input.

Image 8.148 General analog input 16 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

Analog Switch 17
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1799
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 17 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 17 On (page 252) and Analog Switch 17 Off (page 253). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 17 (PAGE 541) analog input.

Image 8.149 General analog input 17 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

InteliLite Global Guide 484

 Analog Switch 18
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1800
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 18 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 18 On (page 255) and Analog Switch 18 Off (page 256). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 18 (PAGE 541) analog input.

Image 8.150 General analog input 18 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

Analog Switch 19
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1801
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 19 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 19 On (page 258) and Analog Switch 19 Off (page 259). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 19 (PAGE 542) analog input.

Image 8.151 General analog input 19 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

InteliLite Global Guide 485

 Analog Switch 20
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1802
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 20 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 20 On (page 261) and Analog Switch 20 Off (page 262). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 20 (PAGE 542) analog input.

Image 8.152 General analog input 20 switch

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

LBO: B
BIN 1 Status
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1374
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 1 is active and open when Binary Input 1 is inactive. When Binary
Input 1 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.

Image 8.153 Binary Input 1 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 486

 BIN 2 Status
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1375
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 2 is active and open when Binary Input 2 is inactive. When Binary
Input 2 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.

Image 8.154 Binary Input 2 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

BIN 3 Status
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1376
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 3 is active and open when Binary Input 3 is inactive. When Binary
Input 3 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.

Image 8.155 Binary Input 3 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 487

 BIN 4 Status
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1377
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 4 is active and open when Binary Input 4 is inactive. When Binary
Input 4 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.

Image 8.156 Binary Input 4 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

BIN 5 Status
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1378
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 5 is active and open when Binary Input 5 is inactive. When Binary
Input 5 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.

Image 8.157 Binary Input 5 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 488

 BIN 6 Status
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1379
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 6 is active and open when Binary Input 6 is inactive. When Binary
Input 6 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.

Image 8.158 Binary Input 6 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

BIN 7 Status
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1380
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 7 is active and open when Binary Input 7 is inactive. When Binary
Input 7 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.

Image 8.159 Binary Input 7 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 489

 LBO: C
Cooling Pump
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 40
Description
This output is dedicated for coolant pump control. It is closed in the moment the gen-set is started and
remains closed until the gen-set is stopped and After Cooling Time (page 175) elapses or the cranking pause
or the Emergency Stop occurs or the controller is switched to OFF mode.

Image 8.160 Cooling Pump

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Cooling
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 74
Description
The output closes when gen-set is in Cooling state.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: E
ECU Communic Error
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 348
Description
This output is active when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the ECU is not established or
has dropped out.
Note: When ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 491) is not configured. If ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 491) is
configured, output is evaluated only when engine is not stop (ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 491) is active).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 490

 ECU Communic OK
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 347
Description
This output is active when an ECU is configured, connected and the communication with the ECU is
established.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU Power Relay

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 116
Description
This output is to be used for control of “keyswitch” input of an ECU. If the particular ECU does not have
keyswitch or a similar input, it can be used for control of DC power for the ECU.
The output closes together with PRESTART (PAGE 506) and remains closed for the entire duration that the
engine is running. It is opened at the moment that the engine comes to a stop (i.e. together with the FUEL
SOLENOID (PAGE 493)).

Image 8.161 ECU Power Relay

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU Red Lamp

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 350
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active “red lamp” flag, i.e. it has detected a critical malfunction
and the engine should not be operated until a service check is performed. This flag is taken from the DM1
frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag in their own proprietary frames and some do
not provide the flag at all.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 491

 ECU Run Stop
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 958
Description
Signal for starting and stopping of ECU.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU Yellow Lamp

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 349
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active “yellow lamp” flag, i.e. it has detected a non-critical
malfunction. This flag is taken from the DM1 frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag
in their own proprietary frames and some do not provide the flag at all.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 1
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1250
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 1. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 264) subgroup. This output is
active when Timer 1 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 264) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 271).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 2
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1251
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 2. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 271) subgroup. This output is
active when Timer 2 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 264) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 271).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 492

 LBO: F
Fault Reset
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 592
Description
When the Fault Reset button is pressed the output is active for 1 s.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Fuel Pump
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1253
Description
Output closes when the value of Fuel Level lies under the value of Fuel Pump On (page 186) setpoint and
opens when value of Fuel Pump Off (page 187) is reached.
This output also can be closed by binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 454). In this case the binary
output FUEL PUMP ON (PAGE 186) is closed until the binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 454) is active
or until the value of Fuel Pump Off (page 187) is reached.
Note: Setpoints Fuel Pump On (page 186) and Fuel Pump Off (page 187) are invisible until configuration of
this LBO.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Fuel Solenoid
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 22
Description
This output controls the fuel solenoid valve. The Fuel Solenoid output has two different behaviors depending
on engine type – gas or diesel. This setting is done by Fuel Solenoid (page 164) setpoint in Engine Settings
group.

InteliLite Global Guide 493

 Diesel:
The output closes before binary output STARTER (PAGE 510).The lead time is adjusted by setpoint Fuel
Solenoid Lead (page 169).

Image 8.162 Fuel Solenoid 1

Image 8.163 Fuel Solenoid 2

The output opens when:

Emergency Stop comes
cooled gen-set is stopped
in pause between repeated starts

InteliLite Global Guide 494

 Gas:
The output closes together with binary output IGNITION (PAGE 503) when engine RPM exceed 30 RPM (fix
value).

Image 8.164 Fuel Solenoid 3

The output opens when:

Emergency Stop comes
cooled gen-set is stopped
in pause between repeated starts

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: G
GCB Close/Open
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 41
Description
The output controls the generator circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued.
Note: InteliLite controllers can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

InteliLite Global Guide 495

 Image 8.165 GCB Close command

Image 8.166 Repeated GCB Close command

Image 8.167 GCB Open command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 496

 GCB OFF Coil
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 43
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5
seconds.

Image 8.168 GCB OFF Coil command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 497

 GCB ON Coil
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 42
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5 second
pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.

Image 8.169 GCB ON Coil close command

Image 8.170 Repeated GCB ON coil close command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

GCB UV Coil
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 44
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of generator circuit breaker. The output is active the

InteliLite Global Guide 498

 whole time when the generator is running. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the
breaker has to be switched off.

Image 8.171 GCB UV Coil close command

Image 8.172 GCB UV Coil open command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 499

 Generator Healthy
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 77
Description
This output is active when the generator voltage and frequency is within limits. It is deactivated:
immediately when the voltage/frequency gets out of limits (when GCB is not closed)
or
with an appropriate delay after the voltage/frequency has got out of limits (when GCB is closed)
The limits for under/overvoltage, under/overfrequency and voltage unbalance as well as appropriate delays
can be found in the setpoints Group: Generator settings (page 194).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Glow Plugs
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1252
Description
This output is dedicated for diesel engine only. This output will close for exact time pre-set by setpoint Glow
Plugs Time (page 168) before every starting attempt. The output opens in same time as the STARTER (PAGE
510) output closes (100 ms after PRESTART (PAGE 506) output opens).

Image 8.173 Glow Plugs

InteliLite Global Guide 500

 When the Glow Plugs Time (page 168) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 165) then the Glow Plugs Time
(page 168) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 165) is long as Cranking Fail Pause (page 165).

Image 8.174 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 1

When the Glow Plugs Time (page 168) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 165) then the Glow Plugs Time
(page 168) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 165) is long as normal Glow Plugs Time (page 168).

Image 8.175 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 2

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 501

 LBO: H
Heartbeat
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 81
Description
This output toggles on/off in a period of 500 ms whenever the controller is switched on and functional.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

HEST Lamp
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1373
Description
This output is closed if ECU send signal HEST Lamp. If ECU stop send HEST LAMP signal binary input will
be opened without no matter if alarms in alarmlist are confirmed or not.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Horn
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1
Description
The output designed to be used for acoustic indication of a newly appeared alarm. The output is activated
each time a new alarm has appeared and remains active until one of the following events occurs:

Fault reset is pressed

Horn reset is pressed

Horn Timeout (page 163) has elapsed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 502

 LBO: I
Idle/Nominal
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 39
Description
This output is used for switching between idle speed and nominal speed of the engine during the startup
phase, if this feature (input) is available on the particular engine. In the case of some EFI engines, the
idle/nominal switching is performed over the communication bus.
The output Idle/Nominal closes after the timer Idle Time (page 169) elapses. The Idle Time (page 169) starts
to countdown when Starting RPM (page 166) reached. The underspeed protection is not evaluated during
fixed 5 seconds period after reaching Starting RPM (page 166). A Start Fail protection occurs if the RPM drop
below 2RPM during idle.

Image 8.176 Idle/Nominal

Note: Connect binary output Idle/Nominal to speed governor to switch the speed:
opened = Idle
closed = Nominal
(for normally open contact type)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ignition
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 37
Description
This output is dedicated to controlling the ignition at a gas engine. The output is closed together with binary
output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) in the moment when the timer Sd Ventilation Time (page 173) elapsed and
the gen-set reaches at least 30 RPM during cranking. The timer Sd Ventilation Time (page 173) become
active when the gen-set has been stopped for any Sd protection or the controller has been turned on only
before first cranking attempt. The output is opened 500ms after all Additional running engine indication
Additional running engine indications (page 103) will be inactive. The output is opened when the gen-
set has to be stopped or in pause during repeated starts.

InteliLite Global Guide 503

 Image 8.177 Ignition 1

Image 8.178 Ignition 2

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ignition On

Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS

Comm object 1257

Description
This input is on since start button is pressed till the unit is completely stopped (or the engine doesn’t start or
Sd or E-Stop becomes active)
Note: This function is the same as ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 491) . Ignition ON stays there from
historical reasons.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 504

 LBO: M
Manual Ready
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1258
Description
This output is active when controller is in MAN mode and the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it
i.e. no red alarm is activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 461) is active (Output READY (PAGE 508) is active).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode AUTO
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 19
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in AUTO mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode MAN
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 18
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in MAN mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode OFF
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 17
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in OFF mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: N
Not Used
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 286
Description
Output has no function.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 505

 LBO: P
Power Switch
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 290
Description
This is an output from the Power switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of
the setpoints Power Switch On (page 190) and Power Switch Off (page 192). When the dummy load function is
used the switching ON of Power switch is block when the engine isn’t running and is allowed 30 s after start
of the engine.

Image 8.179 Power Switch

Note: Setpoints Power Switch On (page 190) and Power Switch Off (page 192) are invisible until
configuration of this LBO.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Prestart
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 36
Description
This output can be used for control of any device, which has to be activated just before start. The output is
closed for time period of Prestart Time (page 166). The output opens 100 ms before the STARTER (PAGE 510)
output closes.

Image 8.180 Engine start

InteliLite Global Guide 506

 When the Prestart Time (page 166) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 165) then the Prestart Time (page
166) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 165) is long as Cranking Fail Pause (page 165) minus 100ms.

Image 8.181 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 1

When the Prestart Time (page 166) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 165) then the Prestart Time (page
166) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 165) is long as normal Prestart Time (page 166).

Image 8.182 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 2

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 507

 LBO: R
Ready To Load
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 58
Description
The output is closed whenever the GCB is closed or can be closed i.e. the stabilization phase is finished, the
gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 171) timer has elapsed.
and the gen-set voltage and frequency are within limits.
If GCB is open then gen-set voltage and frequency must be in limits.
If GCB is close then gen-set voltage and frequency can be out of limits, but protection delay can’t be count
down. If gen-set voltage and frequency will return into limits until delay is count down then output is still
closed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ready
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 62
Description
The binary output is closed, when the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it i.e. no red alarm is
activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 461) is active.
The binary output is switch on when the Ready state occurs.
The binary output is switch off when the Prestart or the Not Ready or the Stop state occurs i.e. always
except Ready state.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

RegenerationNeeded
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1372
Description
This output is closed if ECU send signal Regeneration Needed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 508

 Running
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 67
Description
The output is designed to be used as an indication that the gen-set is running. The output closes if FUEL
SOLENOID (PAGE 493) is closed and STARTER (PAGE 510) and PRESTART (PAGE 506) are open. The out
remains close until engine stop and cooling period elapses.

Image 8.183 Running

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: S
Sd Override
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 962
Description
The output is closed if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 461) input is active and open if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 461) input is
inactive. This output is usually used to send information about SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 461) input into ECU.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 509

 Starter
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 24
Description
This output is dedicated for starter motor control. The number of cranking attempts is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 165) in Engine Settings group. Cranking fail pause is adjusted by setpoint Cranking
Fail Pause (page 165).

Image 8.184 Starter

The starter output opens when:

the “firing” speed is reached
maximum time of cranking is exceeded
request to stop comes up
D+ value is higher than 80%
Oil pressure value is higher than Starting Oil Pressure (page 167)
Generator voltage > 25% of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 158) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 159)
(any phase)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Still Log 0
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 26
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 0.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Still Log 1
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 27
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 1.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 510

 Stop Pulse
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 25
Description
Output is active for 1 second after STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 511) output activation. This signal is sent to ECU
in case of engine stop request.

Image 8.185 Stop Pulse

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Stop Solenoid
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 23
Description
This output is dedicated to control the stop solenoid (valve). The output closes when an engine stop
command is received and remains active until the gen-set is stopped.

Image 8.186 Stop Solenoid 1

InteliLite Global Guide 511

 Image 8.187 Stop Solenoid 2

Note: If Additional running engine indications (page 103) are lost during 5s pause than Stop
Solenoid is not activated again otherwise stop solenoid is activated again.

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 463)

Supplying Load
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1249
Description
The binary output depends on measured generator active power. Power is compared with generator nominal
active power with use of hysteresis and with delay of switch 1 s.
When the measured active power is equal or bigger than 5 % of Nominal Power (page 156) for 1 s than the
binary output is closed.
When the measured active power is equal or lower than 3 % of Nominal Power (page 156) for 1 s than the
binary output is opened.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 512

 LBO: T
Temperature Switch
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 563
Description
This is an output from the Temperature switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Temperature Switch On (page 181) and Temperature Switch Off (page 182).

Image 8.188 Temperature Switch

Note: Setpoints Temperature Switch On (page 181) and Temperature Switch Off (page 182) are invisible
until configuration of this LBO.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 513

8.1.5 Logical analog inputs
What Logical analog inputs are:
Logical analog inputs are inputs for analog values.

Alphabetical groups of Logical analog inputs

LAI: A 516
LAI: C 543
LAI: F 544
LAI: N 545
LAI: O 546

For full list of Logical analog inputs go to the chapter Logical analog inputs alphabetically (page 515).

InteliLite Global Guide 514

 Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Prot 01 516 AIN Switch 18 541

AIN Prot 02 517 AIN Switch 19 542
AIN Prot 03 518 AIN Switch 20 542
AIN Prot 04 519 Coolant Temp 543
AIN Prot 05 520 Fuel Level 544
AIN Prot 06 521 Not Used 545
AIN Prot 07 522 Oil Pressure 546
AIN Prot 08 523
AIN Prot 09 524
AIN Prot 10 525
AIN Prot 11 526
AIN Prot 12 527
AIN Prot 13 528
AIN Prot 14 529
AIN Prot 15 530
AIN Prot 16 531
AIN Prot 17 532
AIN Prot 18 533
AIN Prot 19 534
AIN Prot 20 535
AIN Switch 01 536
AIN Switch 02 536
AIN Switch 03 536
AIN Switch 04 537
AIN Switch 05 537
AIN Switch 06 537
AIN Switch 07 538
AIN Switch 08 538
AIN Switch 09 538
AIN Switch 10 539
AIN Switch 11 539
AIN Switch 12 539
AIN Switch 13 540
AIN Switch 14 540
AIN Switch 15 540
AIN Switch 16 541
AIN Switch 17 541

InteliLite Global Guide 515

 LAI: A
AIN Prot 01
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9999
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 1 Wrn (page 202) and Analog Protection 1 Sd (page 203). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 1 Delay (page 203).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 516

 AIN Prot 02
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9998
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 2 Wrn (page 205) and Analog Protection 2 Sd (page 206). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 2 Delay (page 206).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 517

 AIN Prot 03
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9997
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 3 Wrn (page 208) and Analog Protection 3 Sd (page 209). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 3 Delay (page 209).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 518

 AIN Prot 04
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9996
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 4 Wrn (page 211) and Analog Protection 4 Sd (page 212). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 4 Delay (page 212).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 519

 AIN Prot 05
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9995
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 5 Wrn (page 214) and Analog Protection 5 Sd (page 215). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 5 Delay (page 215).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 520

 AIN Prot 06
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9994
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 6 Wrn (page 217) and Analog Protection 6 Sd (page 218). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 6 Delay (page 218).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 521

 AIN Prot 07
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9993
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 7 Wrn (page 220) and Analog Protection 7 Sd (page 221). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 7 Delay (page 221).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 522

 AIN Prot 08
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9992
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 8 Wrn (page 223) and Analog Protection 8 Sd (page 224). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 8 Delay (page 224).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 523

 AIN Prot 09
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9991
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 9 Wrn (page 226) and Analog Protection 9 Sd (page 227). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 9 Delay (page 227).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 524

 AIN Prot 10
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9990
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 10 Wrn (page 229) and Analog Protection 10 Sd (page 230). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 10 Delay (page 230).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 525

 AIN Prot 11
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9989
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 11 Wrn (page 232) and Analog Protection 11 Sd (page 233). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 11 Delay (page 233).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 526

 AIN Prot 12
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9988
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 12 Wrn (page 235) and Analog Protection 12 Sd (page 236). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 12 Delay (page 236).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 527

 AIN Prot 13
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9987
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 13 Wrn (page 238) and Analog Protection 13 Sd (page 239). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 13 Delay (page 239).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 528

 AIN Prot 14
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9986
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 14 Wrn (page 241) and Analog Protection 14 Sd (page 242). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 14 Delay (page 242).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 529

 AIN Prot 15
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9985
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 15 Wrn (page 244) and Analog Protection 15 Sd (page 245). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 15 Delay (page 245).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 530

 AIN Prot 16
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9984
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 16 Wrn (page 247) and Analog Protection 16 Sd (page 248). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 16 Delay (page 248).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 531

 AIN Prot 17
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9983
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 17 Wrn (page 250) and Analog Protection 17 Sd (page 251). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 17 Delay (page 251).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 532

 AIN Prot 18
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9982
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 18 Wrn (page 253) and Analog Protection 18 Sd (page 254). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 18 Delay (page 254).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 533

 AIN Prot 19
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9981
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 19 Wrn (page 256) and Analog Protection 19 Sd (page 257). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 19 Delay (page 257).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 534

 AIN Prot 20
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9980
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 20 Wrn (page 259) and Analog Protection 20 Sd (page 260). Delay is adjusted by setpoint
Analog Protection 20 Delay (page 260).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 535

 AIN Switch 01
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 209
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 1 (PAGE 476). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 1 On (page 204) and Analog Switch 1 Off (page 205).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 02
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 210
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 2 (PAGE 477). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 2 On (page 207) and Analog Switch 2 Off (page 208).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 03
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 211
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 3 (PAGE 477). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 3 On (page 210) and Analog Switch 3 Off (page 211).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 536

 AIN Switch 04
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 212
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 4 (PAGE 478). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 4 On (page 213) and Analog Switch 4 Off (page 214).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 05
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 278
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 5 (PAGE 478). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 5 On (page 216) and Analog Switch 5 Off (page 217).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 06
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 279
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 6 (PAGE 479). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 6 On (page 219) and Analog Switch 6 Off (page 220).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 537

 AIN Switch 07
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 280
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 7 (PAGE 479). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 7 On (page 222) and Analog Switch 7 Off (page 223).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 08
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 281
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 8 (PAGE 480). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 8 On (page 225) and Analog Switch 8 Off (page 226).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 09
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 282
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 9 (PAGE 480). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 9 On (page 228) and Analog Switch 9 Off (page 229).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 538

 AIN Switch 10
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 283
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 10 (PAGE 481). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 10 On (page 231) and Analog Switch 10 Off (page 232).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 11
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 284
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 11 (PAGE 481). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 11 On (page 234) and Analog Switch 11 Off (page 235).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 12
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 285
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 12 (PAGE 482). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 12 On (page 237) and Analog Switch 12 Off (page 238).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 539

 AIN Switch 13
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 286
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 13 (PAGE 482). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 13 On (page 240) and Analog Switch 13 Off (page 241).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 14
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 287
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 14 (PAGE 483). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 14 On (page 243) and Analog Switch 14 Off (page 244).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 15
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 288
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 15 (PAGE 483). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 15 On (page 246) and Analog Switch 15 Off (page 247).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 540

 AIN Switch 16
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 289
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 16 (PAGE 484). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 16 On (page 249) and Analog Switch 16 Off (page 250).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 17
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 290
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 17 (PAGE 484). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 17 On (page 252) and Analog Switch 17 Off (page 253).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 18
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 291
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 18 (PAGE 485). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 18 On (page 255) and Analog Switch 18 Off (page 256).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 541

 AIN Switch 19
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 292
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 19 (PAGE 485). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 19 On (page 258) and Analog Switch 19 Off (page 259).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 20
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 293
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. This analog input controls logical binary output
ANALOG SWITCH 20 (PAGE 486). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints
Analog Switch 20 On (page 261) and Analog Switch 20 Off (page 262).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 542

 LAI: C
Coolant Temp
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 67
Description
Logical analog input designed for coolant temperature value received from analog sensor. For more
information about wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are
adjusted by setpoints Coolant Temperature Wrn (page 179) and Coolant Temperature Sd (page 179). Delay is
adjusted by setpoint Coolant Temperature Delay (page 179).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case chose
COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 451) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted
via the same setpoint like for analog function.

IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 543

 LAI: F
Fuel Level
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Fuel Level Wrn (page 183) and Fuel Level Sd (page 183). Delay is adjusted by setpoint Fuel Level Delay (page
184).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 185) has to be adjusted correctly.

Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case chose
FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 454) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted via
the same setpoint like for analog function.

IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 544

 LAI: N
Not Used
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 230
Description
Input has no function.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 545

 LAI: O
Oil Pressure
Related FW 1.2.1 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9
Description
Logical analog input designed for oil pressure value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 33. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Oil Pressure Wrn (page 177) and Oil Pressure Sd (page 177). Delay is adjusted by setpoint Oil Pressure Delay
(page 177).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and Sd protection.
Sd Analog value is used for Sd protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via LiteEdit2015.

Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case chose
OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 458) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted
via the same setpoint like for analog function.

IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

8.1.6 PLC
List of PLC groups
Group: Basic Logical functions 549

InteliLite Global Guide 546

 Group: Comparison of analog inputs 552
Group: Time functions 554
Group: Other functions 558

For full list of PLC blocks go to the chapter List of PLC blocks (page 548).

InteliLite Global Guide 547

 List of PLC blocks
Group: Basic logical
functions
OR/AND 549
XOR/RS 551

Group: Comparison of
analog inputs
Comparator With
Hysteresis 552
Comparator With Delay 553

Group: Time functions

Timer 554
Delay 556

Group: Other
functions
Force History Record 558
Force Protection 558

InteliLite Global Guide 548

 Group: Basic Logical functions
OR/AND
PLC group Basic logical functions

Related FW 1.2.1

Related applications AMF, MRS

Comm object 1

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1..8 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1..8
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block performs logical operation OR / AND of 2 - 8 binary operands. The inputs as well as the output can be
inverted.

Function OR
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1

Function AND
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

There have to be at least 2 inputs every time. There may be up to 8 inputs configured.

InteliLite Global Guide 549

 Image 9.1 Configuration of OR/AND block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite Global Guide 550

 XOR/RS
PLC group Basic logical functions
Related FW 1.2.1
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1..2 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1..2
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block provides logical function of two values - XOR or RS flip-flop. Both inputs and output can be
inverted.

Function XOR
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

Function RS
R S Qn+1
0 0 Qn
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 1 0

Image 9.2 Configuration of XOR/RS block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite Global Guide 551

 Group: Comparison of analog inputs
Comparator With Hysteresis
PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.2.1
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 3
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input Analog No Any Compared value
Input ON Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching on
Input OFF Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching off
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block compares the input value with the comparative levels. The behavior depends on whether the ON
level is higher than OFF level or vice versa.

Image 9.3 Different On and Off levels

InteliLite Global Guide 552

 Image 9.4 Configuration of Comp Hyst block

Note: Level On and Level Off can be constants or values from controller.

IMPORTANT: In case that values on inputs have different decimal numbers than the values
are converted and the name of block is red. It is strongly recommended to use values with
the same decimal numbers.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Comparator With Delay

PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.2.1
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 4
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1 Analog No Any Compared value
Input 2 Analog No Same as Input 1 Comparative level
Delay Analog No 0.0..3000,0 [s] Comparative delay
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block works as an analog switch. It compares the input value with the comparative level. The output will
switch on if the input is equal or higher than the comparative level for time longer than the delay.

InteliLite Global Guide 553

 Image 9.5 Principle of delay

Image 9.6 Configuration of Comp Time block

Note: Input 2 and Delay can be constants or values from controller.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Group: Time functions

Timer
PLC group Time functions

Related FW 1.2.1

Related applications AMF, MRS

Comm object 14

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

The timer runs only if this input is
Run Binary No 0/1
active or not connected
This input reloads the timer to the
Reload Binary No 0/1
initial value
Reload
Analog No 0,0..3276,7 [s] Initial value of the timer
value
Outputs

InteliLite Global Guide 554

 Output Type Negation Range Function
Output Binary No 0/1 Timer output
Description
The block works as a countdown timer which is decreased by 1 every PLC cycle. The timer initial value is
adjustable by the "Reload value" input. The timer is automatically reloaded with the initial value when it
reaches zero or it can be reloaded in any other moment using the "reload" input. The timer is held at reload
value until the reload input is deactivated. The timer output is inverted always when the timer is reloaded.

Image 9.7 Principle of timer

Image 9.8 Configuration of Timer block

Note: Input reload value can be constant or value from controller.

Note: If you want the output to start at logical 0, tick First down option. Otherwise the output will start at
logical 1.

IMPORTANT: In case that inputs are not connected and First down option isn´t tick, than
output is active.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite Global Guide 555

 Delay
PLC group Time functions
Related FW 1.2.1
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 33
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input Binary No 0/1 Input signal to be delayed
Delay of the rising edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200,0..3200,0 [s,
Analog No length generated by rising edge of the
up m, h]
input
Delay of the falling edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200,0..3200,0 [s,
Analog No length generated by falling edge of the
down m, h]
input
Resets the output to logical 0. The
output remains in logical 0 until new
Input reset Binary No 0/1
rising edge appears on Input (when
Input reset is deactivated already)
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Output signal
Description
This block can work in two modes of operation:
Delay mode - the rising edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time up" when a rising
edge at the input is detected. The falling edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time
down" when a falling edge at the input is detected. If the delayed falling edge at the output came
earlier than the delayed rising edge, then no pulse would be generated at the output.
Pulse mode - a pulse of "input time up" length is generated at the output when a rising edge is
detected, a pulse of "input time down" length is generated at the output when a falling edge is
detected.

InteliLite Global Guide 556

 Image 9.9 Delay modes principles

Image 9.10 Configuration of Delay block

Note: If Input time up or Input time down value is <0, this input is internally set to zero.

Note: Input time up and Input time down values can be constants or values from controller.

Note: Use Pulse on edge option to choose between delay and pulse mode.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite Global Guide 557

 Group: Other functions
Force History Record
PLC group Other functions
Related FW 1.2.1
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

A record with configured text is
Input Binary No 0/1 recorded into the controller history
when the input is activated.
Outputs
No outputs.
Description
This block writes a record with defined text into the history when the input is activated.

Image 9.11 Configuration of Force Hist block

Note: Maximal number of characters for history message is 15.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Force Protection
PLC group Other functions
Related FW 1.2.1
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 10
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

The input activates yellow level of the
Lvl 1 Binary No 0/1
configured protection if it is configured
The input activates red level of the
Lvl 2 Binary No 0/1 configured protection if a red level
protection is configured
The input activates sensor fail if a fls
Fls Binary No 0/1
protection is configured

InteliLite Global Guide 558

 Outputs
No outputs.
Description
This block issues alarms of configured type and text when appropriate binary input is activated.

Image 9.12 Configuration of Force Prot block

Available protections are:

Monitoring
HistRecOnl
AL Indic
Wrn
Wrn+BOC
BOC
Wrn+Sd
Sd

Note: Maximal number of characters for alarmlist message is 15.

Note: Prefix of protection (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC) is added automatically into alarmlist message.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

8.2 Alarms
8.2.1 Alarms level 1 559
8.2.2 Alarms level 2 581
8.2.3 Fail sensor and other types 599

What alarms are:

The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. For more information see Alarm management on page 82.

8.2.1 Alarms level 1

Warnings 562
Other type 576

InteliLite Global Guide 559

 For full list of Alarms level 1 go to List of alarms level 1 (page 561).
What alarms level 1 are:
The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level. For more information see Alarm types - Level 1 on page 84.

InteliLite Global Guide 560

 List of alarms level 1

Alarm Email 1 Fail 562 Voltage EM(A) - insufficient 577

Alarm Email 2 Fail 562 Wrn Generator L1L2 > EM(A) - missing or
Alarm Email 3 Fail 562 Voltage 570 damaged 577

Alarm Email 4 Fail 562 Wrn Generator L1L2 < EM(B) - a message lost 577
Voltage 570 EM(B) - configuration
Alarm SMS 1 Fail 563
Wrn Generator L2 > mistake 578
Alarm SMS 2 Fail 563
Voltage 571 EM(B) - insufficient 578
Alarm SMS 3 Fail 563
Wrn Generator L2 < EM(B) - missing or
Alarm SMS 4 Fail 563
Voltage 571 damaged 578
Battery Charge Fail 564
Wrn Generator L2L3 > Generator CCW Rotation 578
ECU Wait To Start 564 Voltage 571
Module(slotA) - comm.
Event Email 1 Fail 564 Wrn Generator L2L3 < outage 579
Event Email 2 Fail 564 Voltage 571
Module(slotA) - false
Event Email 3 Fail 565 Wrn Generator L3 > module 579
Event Email 4 Fail 565 Voltage 572
Module(slotA) -
Event SMS 1 Fail 565 Wrn Generator L3 < unattended 579
Voltage 572
Event SMS 2 Fail 565 Module(slotA) -
Wrn Generator L3L1 > unexpected 579
Event SMS 3 Fail 566
Voltage 572
Event SMS 4 Fail 566 Module(slotA) - unknown
Wrn Generator L3L1 < module 580
Rental Timer 1 Elapsed 566
Voltage 573
Module(slotB) - comm.
Rental Timer 2 Elapsed 566
Wrn Generator > outage 580
Rental Timer Block Start 566 Frequency 573
Module(slotB) - false
Wrn Battery Voltage 567 Wrn Generator < module 580
Wrn Charging Alternator Frequency 573
Module(slotB) -
Fail 567 Wrn Check DPF Status 573 unattended 580
Wrn Coolant Temperature Wrn Maintenance 1 574 Module(slotB) -
Low 567
Wrn Maintenance 2 574 unexpected 581
Wrn Coolant Temp 567
Wrn Maintenance 3 574 Module(slotB) - unknown
Wrn ECU Communication module 581
Wrn Oil Pressure 574
Fail 568
Wrn Overload 575
Wrn Fence 1 Alarm 568
Wrn Override All Sd 575
Wrn Fence 2 Alarm 568
Wrn Rental Timer 1 575
Wrn Fuel Level 569
Wrn Rental Timer 2 575
Wrn Fuel Thief 569
Wrn Stop Fail 576
Wrn AIN Prot 569
After-Treatment 576
Wrn BIN Protection 1..48 569
EM(A) - a message lost 576
Wrn Generator L1 >
EM(A) - configuration
Voltage 569
mistake 577
Wrn Generator L1 < 570

InteliLite Global Guide 561

 Warnings
Alarm Email 1 Fail
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 1 (page 326) and email wasn’t
send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Alarm Email 2 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 2 (page 326) and email wasn’t
send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Alarm Email 3 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 3 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 3 (page 327) and email wasn’t
send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Alarm Email 4 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 4 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 4 (page 327) and email wasn’t
send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 562

 Alarm SMS 1 Fail
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 322) and SMS
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Alarm SMS 2 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 2 (page 323) and SMS
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Alarm SMS 3 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 3 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 3 (page 323) and SMS
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Alarm SMS 4 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 4 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 4 (page 324) and SMS
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 563

 Battery Charge Fail
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Battery Charge Fail
Alarm evaluated Mains is OK
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is activated when logical binary input BATTERY CHARGE (PAGE 450) is
Description
active.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ECU Wait To Start

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message ECU Wait To Start
Alarm evaluated Only when ECU is connected
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Wait To Start lamp
is activated.
Description
Note: This lamp can be ignored during prestart phase. Use LiteEdit2015 to
enable this function.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Event Email 1 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event Email 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 1 (page 326) and email wasn’t
send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Event Email 2 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event Email 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 2 (page 326) and email wasn’t
send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 564

 Event Email 3 Fail
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event Email 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 3 (page 327) and email wasn’t
send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Event Email 4 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event Email 4 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 4 (page 327) and email wasn’t
send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Event SMS 1 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event SMS 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 322) and SMS
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Event SMS 2 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event SMS 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 2 (page 323) and SMS
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 565

 Event SMS 3 Fail
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event SMS 3 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 3 (page 323) and SMS
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Event SMS 4 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event SMS 4 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 4 (page 324) and SMS
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Rental Timer 1 Elapsed

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Rental Timer 1 Elapsed
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is activated when Rental Timer 1 (page 278) elapses.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Rental Timer 2 Elapsed

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Rental Timer 2 Elapsed
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is activated when Rental Timer 2 (page 280) elapses.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Rental Timer Block Start

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Rental Timer Block Start
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite Global Guide 566

 Related applications AMF, MRS
Alarm is active when there is start command and Rental Timer 1 (page 278) or
Description
Rental Timer 2 (page 280) elapsed.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Battery Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Battery Voltage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is out of limits.
The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Battery < Voltage (page 190)

Battery > Voltage (page 190)
Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 190)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Charging Alternator Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if the engine is running and the voltage on the D+ terminal is
lower than 80% of the controller supply voltage. This alarm works similar to the red
Description “battery” alarm indicator on a vehicle dashboard.
The setpoint D+ Function (page 167) has to be in Charge Fail or Enabled position to
enable this alarm.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Coolant Temperature Low

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Coolant Temperature Low
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the coolant temperature is lower than the temperature set
Description
in Coolant Temperature Low Wrn (page 182) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Coolant Temp

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Coolant Temp
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite Global Guide 567

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the coolant temperature is higher than the temperature set
Description
in Coolant Temperature Wrn (page 179) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ECU Communication Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU Communication Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU is not established or has dropped out.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fence 1 Alarm

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:

Description Geo-Fencing (page 285)

Fence 1 Protection (page 286)
Fence Radius 1 (page 284)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fence 2 Alarm

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:

Description Geo-Fencing (page 285)

Fence 2 Protection (page 287)
Fence Radius 2 (page 284)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 568

 Wrn Fuel Level
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Level
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the fuel level is lower than the level set in Fuel Level Wrn
Description
(page 183) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fuel Thief

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Thief
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when the fuel level value measured at relevant AI (Fuel Level)
Description
drops faster than is the limit adjusted by setpoint Maximal Fuel Drop (page 185).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn AIN Prot

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn + Name of analog input 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that value the general analog protection is out of warning
Description
protection limit.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn BIN Protection 1..48

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn + Name of binary input
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Binary input also can be adjusted like alarm. In this case message in alarmlist
Description contains prefix - Wrn and binary input name. This alarm occurs, when appropriate
binary input is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1 > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite Global Guide 569

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Voltage Wrn (page 198)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage Wrn (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1L2 > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L1L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Voltage Wrn (page 198)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage Wrn (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 570

 Wrn Generator L2 > Voltage
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Voltage Wrn (page 198)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage Wrn (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2L3 > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L2L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Voltage Wrn (page 198)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2L3 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L2L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite Global Guide 571

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage Wrn (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3 > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Voltage Wrn (page 198)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage Wrn (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3L1 > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L3L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Voltage Wrn (page 198)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 572

 Wrn Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage Wrn (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator > Frequency

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator > Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Frequency Wrn (page 201)
Generator <> Frequency BOC Delay (page 202)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator < Frequency

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator < Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Frequency Wrn (page 202)
Generator <> Frequency BOC Delay (page 202)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Check DPF Status

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Check DPF Status
Alarm evaluated When ECU is configured
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when ECU send alarm message about Tier IV protection.
Description
Note: Tier IV protection have to be supported by ECU.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 573

 Wrn Maintenance 1
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 (page 188) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. It will continue to count down
Description
to negative values and the alarm message will remain in the alarm list (even if the
controller is switched off and on again) until the setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive
value.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance 2
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 2
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 2 (page 189) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. It will continue to count down
Description
to negative values and the alarm message will remain in the alarm list (even if the
controller is switched off and on again) until the setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive
value.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance 3
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 3
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 3 (page 189) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. It will continue to count down
Description
to negative values and the alarm message will remain in the alarm list (even if the
controller is switched off and on again) until the setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive
value.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Oil Pressure

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Oil Pressure
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite Global Guide 574

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the oil pressure is lower than the pressure set in Oil
Description
Pressure Wrn (page 177) setpoint.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Overload
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Overload
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Overload Wrn (page 194) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload BOC Delay (page 194) Overload Del adjusts the delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Override All Sd

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Override All Sd
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm occurs when binary input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 461) is activated.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Rental Timer 1

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Rental Timer 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs xx hours before Rental Timer 1 (page 278) elapsed. Hours are
Description
adjusted by setpoint Rental Timer 1 Wrn (page 280).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Rental Timer 2

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Rental Timer 2
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs xx hours before Rental Timer 2 (page 280) elapsed. Hours are
Description
adjusted by setpoint Rental Timer 2 Wrn (page 282).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 575

 Wrn Stop Fail
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Stop Fail
Alarm evaluated While the engine shall be stopped
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs if the gen-set shall be stopped, but some symptom indicates that
it is not stopped. The period when the gen-set shall be stopped begins after the
FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) has been switched off and time delay Stop Time (page
174) has elapsed and lasts for the entire time the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 493) or
STARTER (PAGE 510) are off.

Description

Image 9.13 Stop Fail

Note: Gen-set cannot be started until this alarm is inactive and reset.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Other type
After-Treatment
Alarm Type Alarm indication
Alarmlist message After-Treatment
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm occurs when appropriate after-treatment lamp is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

EM(A) - a message lost

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - a message lost
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between controller
Description
and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 576

 EM(A) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - configuration mistake
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 1 (page 326) and email wasn’t
send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

EM(A) - missing or damaged

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - missing or damaged
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in slot
Description
(in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in slot).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

EM(B) - a message lost

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(B) - a message lost
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between controller
Description
and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 577

 EM(B) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(B) - configuration mistake
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 1 (page 326) and email wasn’t
send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

EM(B) - missing or damaged

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(B) - missing or damaged
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in slot
Description
(in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in slot).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Generator CCW Rotation

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Generator CCW Rotation
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The controller detects phase sequence on generator voltage terminals. This
protection is important after controller installation to avoid wrong voltage phase
Description connection. There is a fixed defined phase sequence in InteliLite controller: T35 =
N, T36 = L1, T37 = L2 and T38 = L3. When the phases are connected in a different
order, alarms are detected. This alarm prevent circuit breaker closing.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 578

 Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between controller
Description
and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Module(slotA) - false module

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - fake module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Module(slotA) - unattended
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unattended
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 579

 Module(slotA) - unknown module
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unknown module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Module(slotB) - comm. outage

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - comm. outage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between controller
Description
and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Module(slotB) - false module

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - fake module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Module(slotB) - unattended
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unattended
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 580

 Module(slotB) - unexpected
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unexpected
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Module(slotB) - unknown module

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unknown module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fuel Transfer Failed

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm evaluated When FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) is active
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will occur when there is no increase of fuel level when FUEL PUMP
Description
(PAGE 493) is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Transferring Fuel

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Transferring Fuel
Alarm evaluated When FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) is active
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm will occur when FUEL PUMP (PAGE 493) is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

8.2.2 Alarms level 2

Shutdown 584
Other type 593

For full list of Alarms level 2 go to List of alarms level 2 (page 583).
What alarms level 2 are:
The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached. For

InteliLite Global Guide 581

 more information see Alarm types - Level 2 on page 84.

InteliLite Global Guide 582

 List of alarms level 2

Emergency Stop 584 Sd RPM Measurement

Sd Battery Flat 584 Fail 592

Sd Coolant Temp 584 Sd Short Circuit 592

Sd Current Unbalance 584 Sd Start Fail 593

Sd Earth Fault Current 585 Sd Underspeed 593

Sd Fence 1 Alarm 585 BOC Coolant Temp 593

Sd Fence 2 Alarm 585 BOC Current Unbalance 594

Sd Fuel Level 586 BOC Fence 1 Alarm 594

Sd GCB Fail 586 BOC Fence 2 Alarm 594

Sd AIN Protec 1 586 BOC Fuel Level 595

Sd BIN Protection 1..48 587 BOC AIN Prot 595

Sd Generator L1 > Voltage 587 BOC BIN Protection 1..48 595

Sd Generator L1 < Voltage 587 BOC Generator L1 <

Voltage 595
Sd Generator L1L2 >
Voltage 587 BOC Generator L1L2 <
Voltage 596
Sd Generator L1L2 <
Voltage 588 BOC Generator L2 <
Voltage 596
Sd Generator L2 > Voltage 588
BOC Generator L2L3 <
Sd Generator L2 < Voltage 588
Voltage 596
Sd Generator L2L3 >
BOC Generator L3 <
Voltage 588
Voltage 596
Sd Generator L2L3 <
BOC Generator L3L1 <
Voltage 589
Voltage 597
Sd Generator L3 > Voltage 589
BOC Generator >
Sd Generator L3 < Voltage 589
Frequency 597
Sd Generator L3L1 >
BOC Generator <
Voltage 590
Frequency 597
Sd Generator L3L1 <
BOC Gen Voltage
Voltage 590
Unbalance ph-n 598
Sd Generator > Frequency 590
BOC Overcurrent IDMT 598
Sd Generator < Frequency 590
BOC Overload 598
Sd Generator Voltage
BOC Rental Timer 599
Unbalance Ph-Ph 591
BOC Short Circuit 599
Sd Generator Voltage
Unbalance Ph-N 591
Sd Oil Pressure 591
Sd Overload 592
Sd Overspeed 592

InteliLite Global Guide 583

 Shutdown
Emergency Stop
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Emergency Stop
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Alarm is activated when binary input EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 453) is activated.
The gen-set shuts down in the moment the input is activated and starting is
blocked until the input is deactivated and fault reset is pressed.

Description Note: Use red emergency button placed on the switchboard door and connect
it to a binary input of the controller. Then configure the function Emergency
Stop to this binary input. It is recommended to use NC contact of the button.

Note: The MCB control is not affected by this alarm.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Battery Flat
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Battery Flat
Alarm evaluated During cranking
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will be issued if the controller was reset during cranking of the gen-set.
If this situation occurs, the controller supposes the starting battery is so exhausted
Description
that its voltage drops so low when starter motor is energized that it causes
controller reset.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Coolant Temp
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Coolant Temp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the coolant temperature is higher than the temperature set
Description
in Coolant Temperature Sd (page 179) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Current Unbalance
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Current Unbalance
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite Global Guide 584

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase currents, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase current at any given time. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Current Unbalance BOC (page 197) adjusts the maximum allowed difference
between the highest and lowest phase current at any given time.
Current Unbalance BOC Delay (page 197) adjusts the alarm delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Earth Fault Current

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Earth Fault Current
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the value of earth fault current is higher than adjusted
limit. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Earth Fault Sd (page 340) adjusts the maximum allowed earth fault current.
Earth Fault Delay (page 339) adjusts the alarm delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:

Description Geo-Fencing (page 285)

Fence 1 Protection (page 286)
Fence Radius 1 (page 284)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite Global Guide 585

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:

Description Geo-Fencing (page 285)

Fence 1 Protection (page 286)
Fence Radius 1 (page 284)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Fuel Level
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fuel Level
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the fuel level is lower than the level set in Fuel Level Sd
Description
(page 183) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd GCB Fail
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd GCB Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will occur when the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 455) input does not match
the expected position given by the GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 495) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback persists.
If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
Description
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be issued
immediately.
The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to an open or
close command within 5 seconds.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd AIN Protec 1
Alarm Type Sd
Alarmlist message Sd + Name of analog input
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that value the general analog protection is out of shutdown
Description
protection limit.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite Global Guide 586

 Sd BIN Protection 1..48
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd + Name of binary input
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Binary input also can be adjusted like alarm. In this case message in alarmlist
Description contains prefix - Sd and binary input name. This alarm occurs, when appropriate
binary input is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L1 > Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Voltage Sd (page 198)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L1L2 > Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Voltage Sd (page 198)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

InteliLite Global Guide 587

 6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L1L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L2 > Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Voltage Sd (page 198)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L2L3 > Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite Global Guide 588

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Voltage Sd (page 198)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L2L3 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L3 > Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Voltage Sd (page 198)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L3 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite Global Guide 589

 Sd Generator L3L1 > Voltage
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Voltage Sd (page 198)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L3L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator > Frequency

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator > Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Frequency BOC (page 201)
Generator <> Frequency BOC Delay (page 202)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator < Frequency

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator < Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite Global Guide 590

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Frequency BOC (page 201)
Generator <> Frequency BOC Delay (page 202)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase to phase voltage, i.e. the
difference between highest and lowest phase to phase voltage at any given time.
The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 200) adjusts the maximum allowed difference
between the highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time.
Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 200) adjusts the alarm delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator Voltage Unbalance Ph-N

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator Voltage Unbalance Ph-N
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase voltage, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 200) adjusts the maximum allowed difference
between the highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time.
Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 200) adjusts the alarm delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Oil Pressure
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Oil Pressure
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the oil pressure is lover than the pressure set in Oil
Description
Pressure Sd (page 177) setpoint.

InteliLite Global Guide 591

 6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Overload
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Overload
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the following
Description setpoints:
Overload BOC (page 194) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload BOC Delay (page 194) adjusts the delay

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Overspeed
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Overspeed
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs immediately when the engine speed has exceeded the limit. The
behavior of the overspeed alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
Overspeed Sd (page 175) adjust the overspeed limit
Description
Overspeed Overshot (page 176) adjust the additional overspeed limit
Overspeed Overshot Period (page 176) adjust the time period of additional
overspeed limit

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd RPM Measurement Fail

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd RPM Measurement Fail
Alarm evaluated During cranking
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued if the engine speed has not exceeded the Starting RPM (page
Description 166) within the Maximum Cranking Time (page 165), although some of additional
running engine indication sources indicate that the engine has started.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Short Circuit
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Short Circuit
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite Global Guide 592

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This is a fast overcurrent protection. The following setpoints are related to this
alarm:
Description
Short Circuit BOC (page 195) adjusts the short current limit
Short Circuit BOC Delay (page 195) adjusts the delay in fine steps

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Start Fail
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Start Fail
Alarm evaluated When the gen-set is being started
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will be issued after all attempts to start the gen-set have run out but the
Description gen-set did not start. The following setpoints are related to this alarm:
Cranking Attempts (page 165) adjust the number of attempts

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Underspeed
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Underspeed
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will be issued when the gen-set is running and then stops by itself, i.e.
the RPM drops under the value of setpoint Starting RPM (page 166).
Description
The underspeed alarm starts to be evaluated after successful gen-set start and is
being evaluated for the entire time that the fuel solenoid is on.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Other type
BOC Coolant Temp
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Coolant Temperature
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the coolant temperature is higher than the temperature set
Description
in Coolant Temperature Sd (page 179) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite Global Guide 593

 BOC Current Unbalance
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Current Unbalance
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase currents, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase current at any given time. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Current Unbalance BOC (page 197) adjusts the maximum allowed difference
between the highest and lowest phase current at any given time.
Current Unbalance BOC Delay (page 197) adjusts the alarm delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Fence 1 Alarm

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:

Description Geo-Fencing (page 285)

Fence 1 Protection (page 286)
Fence Radius 1 (page 284)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Fence 2 Alarm

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:

Description Geo-Fencing (page 285)

Fence 1 Protection (page 286)
Fence Radius 1 (page 284)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite Global Guide 594

 BOC Fuel Level
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fuel Level
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the fuel level is lower than the level set level in Fuel Level
Description
Sd (page 183) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC AIN Prot

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC + Name of analog input
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the value of general analog protection is out of BOC
Description
protection limit.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC BIN Protection 1..48

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC + Name of binary input
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Binary input also can be adjusted like alarm. In this case message in alarmlist
Description contains prefix - BOC and binary input name. This alarm occurs, when appropriate
binary input is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite Global Guide 595

 BOC Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L2L3 < Voltage

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L2L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L3 < Voltage

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite Global Guide 596

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L3L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Voltage BOC (page 199)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 200)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator > Frequency

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator > Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator > Frequency BOC (page 201)
Generator <> Frequency BOC Delay (page 202)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator < Frequency

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator < Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator < Frequency BOC (page 201)
Generator <> Frequency BOC Delay (page 202)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite Global Guide 597

 BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance ph-n
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance ph-n
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase voltages, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 200) adjusts the maximum allowed difference
between the highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time.
Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 200) adjusts the alarm delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Overcurrent IDMT
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd + Name of binary input
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
The overcurrent alarm is based on IDMT principle. The reaction time of an IDMT
alarm is not fixed, but depends on how much is the protected value (generator
current in this case) above the limit (Nominal Current (page 156)). The higher is the
overcurrent, the shorter the reaction time will be. All generator phases are
evaluated.
Description
The behaviour of the overcurrent alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page 196) defines the reaction time of the
protection when the current is twice the amount of nominal value.
Nominal Current (page 156) set the nominal current level, where the alarm
starts to be evaluated. The reaction time is infinite at this point.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Overload
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Overload
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the following
Description setpoints:
Overload BOC (page 194) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload BOC Delay (page 194) adjusts the delay

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite Global Guide 598

 BOC Rental Timer
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message BOC Rental Timer
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm occurs when Rental Timer BOC (page 282) elapses.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Short Circuit

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Short Circuit
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This is a fast overcurrent protection. The following setpoints are related to this
alarm:
Description
Short Circuit BOC (page 195) adjusts the short current limit
Short Circuit BOC Delay (page 195) adjusts the delay in fine steps

6 back to List of alarms level 2

8.2.3 Fail sensor and other types

Fls AIN Prot 601
Fls Coolant Temp 601
Fls Fuel Level 601
Fls Oil Pressure 601

For full list of Fails sensor and other types of alarms go to List of fail sensor alarms (page 600).
What Fail sensor and other types of alarms are
If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor fail will be detected and a
sensor fail message will appear in the Alarmlist. For more information see Sensor fail detection (FLS) on
page 85.

InteliLite Global Guide 599

 List of fail sensor alarms

Fls AIN Prot 601

Fls Coolant Temp 601
Fls Fuel Level 601
Fls Oil Pressure 601

InteliLite Global Guide 600

 Fail sensor
Fls AIN Prot
Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls + name of analog input 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the value of general analog protection is out of range or is
Description
missing.

6 back to List of fail sensor alarms

Fls Coolant Temp

Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls Coolant Temperature
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when measurement value of coolant temperature is out of range
Description
or is missing.

6 back to List of fail sensor alarms

Fls Fuel Level

Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls Fuel Level
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when measurement value of fuel level is out of range or is
Description
missing.

6 List of fail sensor alarms (page 600)

Fls Oil Pressure

Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls Oil Pressure
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when measurement value of oil pressure is out of range or is
Description
missing.

6 back to List of fail sensor alarms

8.3 Modules
8.3.1 Plug-In modules 602

InteliLite Global Guide 601

8.3.1 Plug-In modules
Communication modules 602
Extension modules 613

IMPORTANT: 2nd generation of InteliLite controllers does not support new modules and 3rd
generation does not support all old modules.

The available communication plug-in modules for the 3rd generation are:
CM-RS232-485 - communication module for connection via RS232 or RS485 line
CM-4G-GPS - communication module for connection via 4G
CM-GPRS - communication module for connection via GPRS
CM-Ethernet - communication module for internet connection via Ethernet
The available extension plug-in modules for the 3rd generation are:
EM-BIO8-EFCP - extension module with 8 binary inputs/outputs and with earth fault current protection

Note: Controller has 2 plug-in module slots.

Communication modules
CM-RS232-485 602
CM-Ethernet 603
CM-GPRS 605
CM-4G-GPS 609

CM-RS232-485
CM-RS232-485 is optional plug-in card to enable InteliLite the RS232 and RS485 communication. This is
required for computer or MODBUS connection. The CM-RS232-485 is a dual port module with RS232 and
RS485 interfaces at independent COM channels. The RS232 is connected to COM1 and RS485 to COM2.

Image 9.14 CM-RS232-485 interface

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

InteliLite Global Guide 602

 Image 9.15 Pinout of RS-232 line

Image 9.16 Pinout of RS-485 line

Note: Balancing resistors shall be both closed at only one device in whole RS485 network.

Maximal distance of line is 10m for RS232 line and 1200m for RS485 line.

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into LiteEdit2015
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via LiteEdit2015
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in LiteEdit2015).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

CM-Ethernet
CM-Ethernet is a plug-in card with Ethernet 10/100 Mbit interface in RJ45 connector. It provides an interface for
connecting a PC with through ethernet/internet network, for sending active e-mails and for integration of the

InteliLite Global Guide 603

 controller into a building management (MODBUS TCP and SNMP protocols). This card also enables to monitor
and control the gen-set over web browser from any location with internet access using appropriate security
measures.

Image 9.17 CM-Ethernet interface

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

Use an Ethernet UTP cable with a RJ45 connector for linking the module with your Ethernet network. The
module can also be connected directly to a PC using cross-wired UTP cable.

Image 9.18 Cross-wired cable

Module setup
All settings related to the module are to be adjusted via the controller setpoints. The respective setpoints are
located in the setpoint Group: CM-Ethernet (page 326).
All actual operational values like actual IP address etc. are available in controller values in a specific group as
well.
On module is also indication LED. Following states are indicated via this LED:
bootloader mode with communication with controller - green LED is blinking in period 50ms/50ms
bootloader mode without communication with controller - red LED is blinking in period 50ms/50ms

InteliLite Global Guide 604

 operating mode with communication with controller - green LED is blinking in period 500ms/500ms
operating mode without communication with controller - red LED is blinking in period 500ms/500ms
test mode - green LED is blinking in period 250ms/250ms

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into LiteEdit2015
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via LiteEdit2015
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in LiteEdit2015).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

CM-GPRS
CM-GPRS plug-in module is a GSM/GPRS modem which can works in two modes of operation based on the
settings in the setpoint Mode (page 314).

Image 9.19 CM-GPRS module

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

IMPORTANT: CM-4G-GPS and CM-GPRS modules cant be used in one controller in the same time.

Note: GPRS and CSD services must be provided by your GSM/GPRS operator for successful operation.

Note: The GPRS and CSD connection should not be used for the firmware update process.

CM-GPRS module works with:

WebSupervisor – internet-based remote monitoring solution
AirGate – powerful connection technology to make internet access as simple as possible

InteliLite Global Guide 605

 SIM card settings
SIM card to be used in CM-4G-GPS or CM-GPRS modules must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled

How to start using CM-GPRS module

You will need a controller, CM-GPRS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data service.
Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. I.e. if you want to use the
module in GPRS (2,5G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card does support
2,5G network.
Contact your mobile operator for getting packet data APN (APN = Access Point Name), username and
password.
Example: APN Name = "internet", UserName = [blank], Password = [blank].

Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM-GPRS card
Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.
Switch off the controller.
Insert CM-GPRS module into controller
Power up the controller.
Select the mode of CM-GPRS module by adjusting setpoint Mode.
Enter correct APN Name, APN User Name and APN User Password in controller’s setpoint group CM-
GPRS which is accessible by PAGE button from any measurement screen on controller. Setpoints can be
set on controller’s front panel keyboard or by LiteEdit2015.
Switch the controller off and on.
Wait for approx 2 - 4 minutes for first connection of the system to AirGate. AirGate will generate
automatically the AirGate ID value. Then navigate to measurement screens where you will find signal
strength bar and AirGate ID identifier.

Image 9.20 Main screen of CM-GPRS module

InteliLite Global Guide 606

 Image 9.21 Screen of AirGate

GSM Diag Code – Diagnostic code for CM-GPRS modem

GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 Modul is switched off
3 Module is switched on
4 Module – error in initialization
5 Module – not possible to set the APN
6 Module – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 Module – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 Module – not accepted DNS IP address
9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or unknown
11
status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by locked
14
SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected
19 No CDMA network
20 Unsuccessful registration to CDMA network
21 SIMCom/ME909s: can´t read FW version
22 SIMCom: GSM signal not found
23 SIMCom: can´t detect module speed

InteliLite Global Guide 607

 24 SIMCom: HW reset issued
25 PUK is required
26 Error of SIM card detected
27 ME909s: can't set module bps
28 ME909s: can't set link configuration
29 ME909s: can't do power-off
30 ME909s: can't do power-on
31 ME909s: can't do hardware reset
32 ME909s: ME909s not started
33 ME909s: switch off issued
34 ME909s: switch on issued
35 ME909s: HW reset issued
36 ME909s: can't switch echo off
37 ME909s: can't find out state of registration
38 ME909s: GSM signal not found
39 ME909s: no SIM memory for SMS
40 ME909s: waiting for registration
41 Can't read operator name
42 ME909s: can't set flow control
43 APN not typed
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate

AirGate Diag – Diagnostic Code for AirGate connection

Code Description
0 Waiting for connection to AirGate Server
1 Controller registered, waiting for authorization
2 Not possible to register, controller blacklisted
3 Not possible to register, server has no more capacity
4 Not possible to register, other reason
5 Controller registered and authorized

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into LiteEdit2015
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via LiteEdit2015
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in LiteEdit2015).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.

InteliLite Global Guide 608

 The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

CM-4G-GPS
CM-4G-GPS plug-in module containing a GPS receiver and GSM/WCDMA/LTE modem which can works in
two modes of operation based on the settings in the setpoint Mode (page 314).

Image 9.22 CM-4G-GPS module

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

IMPORTANT: CM-4G-GPS and CM-GPRS modules cant be used in one controller in the same time.

IMPORTANT: Operating temperature of module is from -30°C to +75°C.

Note: Cellular data service must be enabled in your SIM card by your mobile operator for successful operation.

CM-4G-GPS module works with:

WebSupervisor – internet-based remote monitoring solution
AirGate – powerful connection technology to make internet access as simple as possible
Locate – Celluar network based localization service
CM-4G-GPS module also works like GPS locator. Geo-fencing function can be used with this module.
Supported 4G bands are as follows:
FDD LTE: Band 1, Band 2, Band 3, Band 4, Band 5, Band 7, Band 8, Band 20, all bands with diversity
WCDMA/HSDPA/HSUPA/HSPA+: Band 1, Band 2, Band 5, Band 8, all bands with diversity
GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz/1900 MHz

SIM card settings

SIM card to be used in CM-4G-GPS or CM-GPRS modules must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled

How to start using CM-4G-GPS module

You will need a controller, CM-4G-GPS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data service.

InteliLite Global Guide 609

 Note: Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. - i.e. if you want to use
the module in LTE (4G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card supports 4G
network.

Contact your mobile operator for getting packet data APN (APN = Access Point Name), username and
password.
Example: APN Name = "internet", UserName = [blank], Password = [blank].

Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM-4G-GPS card
Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.
If you want to use the built-in GPS receiver connect also an active GPS antenna to the GPS antenna
connector.
Switch off the controller.
Insert CM-4G-GPS module into controller
Power up the controller.
Select the mode of CM-4G-GPS module by adjusting setpoint Mode.
Enter correct APN Name, APN User Name and APN User Password in controller’s setpoint group CM-4G-
GPS which is accessible by PAGE button from any measurement screen on controller. Setpoints can be set
on controller’s front panel keyboard or by LiteEdit2015.
Switch the controller off and on.
Wait for approx 2 - 4 minutes for first connection of the system to AirGate. AirGate will generate
automatically the AirGate ID value. Then navigate to measurement screens where you will find signal
strength bar and AirGate ID identifier.

Image 9.23 Main screen of CM-4G-GPS module

InteliLite Global Guide 610

 Image 9.24 Screen of AirGate

GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules

GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 Modul is switched off
3 Module is switched on
4 Module – error in initialization
5 Module – not possible to set the APN
6 Module – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 Module – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 Module – not accepted DNS IP address
9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or unknown
11
status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by locked
14
SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected
19 No CDMA network
20 Unsuccessful registration to CDMA network
21 SIMCom/ME909s: can´t read FW version
22 SIMCom: GSM signal not found
23 SIMCom: can´t detect module speed

InteliLite Global Guide 611

 24 SIMCom: HW reset issued
25 PUK is required
26 Error of SIM card detected
27 ME909s: can't set module bps
28 ME909s: can't set link configuration
29 ME909s: can't do power-off
30 ME909s: can't do power-on
31 ME909s: can't do hardware reset
32 ME909s: ME909s not started
33 ME909s: switch off issued
34 ME909s: switch on issued
35 ME909s: HW reset issued
36 ME909s: can't switch echo off
37 ME909s: can't find out state of registration
38 ME909s: GSM signal not found
39 ME909s: no SIM memory for SMS
40 ME909s: waiting for registration
41 Can't read operator name
42 ME909s: can't set flow control
43 APN not typed
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate

AirGate Diag – Diagnostic Code for AirGate connection

Code Description
0 Waiting for connection to AirGate Server
1 Controller registered, waiting for authorization
2 Not possible to register, controller blacklisted
3 Not possible to register, server has no more capacity
4 Not possible to register, other reason
5 Controller registered and authorized

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into LiteEdit2015
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via LiteEdit2015
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in LiteEdit2015).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.

InteliLite Global Guide 612

 The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

Extension modules
EM-BIO8-EFCP 613

EM-BIO8-EFCP
EM-BIO8-EFCP is optional plug-in card. Through this card controller can accommodate one AC current (CT)
measuring input (1A or 5A input) and up to 8 binary inputs or outputs. In LiteEdit2015 PC configuration tool it is
possible to easily choose if particular I/O will be binary input or output.

Image 9.25 EM-BIO8-EFCP interface

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

IMPORTANT: Earth fault current measurement is supported by controller only in slot A.

InteliLite Global Guide 613

 Image 9.26 Overview of EM-BIO8-EFCP

Image 9.27 EM-BIO8-EFCP wiring

EM-BIO8-EFCP technical data

Power supply
Power supply range 8-36 VDC

Binary inputs
Number Up to 8, non-isolated
0-2 VDC close contact
Close/Open indication
>6 VDC open contact

InteliLite Global Guide 614

 Binary outputs
Number Up to 8 , non-isolated

Max. current 0,5A

Switching to positive supply terminal

Current measuring input

Number of inputs 2

Nominal input current 1A/5A

Load (CT output impedance) < 0,1

Max measured current from CT 10 A

Current measurement
2% from Nominal current
tolerance
Max peak current from CT 150 A / 1 s

Max continuous current 10 A

Earth fault current measurement

The Earth Fault protection is done by the extension module EM-BIO8-EFCP.
When the measured current exceeds the set value, which indicates that part of the current is dispersed to earth,
and when the set Earth Fault Delay (page 339) time elapses, the Earth Fault Current Protection (page 338), Sd
Earth Fault Current (page 585) alarm and AL EARTH FAULT (PAGE 469) output are activated. Earth Fault
protection is not active when gen-set does not run and when the Earth Fault Current Protection (page 338) is
disabled.
IMPORTANT: Earth fault current measurement is not intended to protect human health, but the
machines!

Image 9.28 Earth fault current protection

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into LiteEdit2015
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via LiteEdit2015
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware

InteliLite Global Guide 615

 you want to program into the module (in LiteEdit2015).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

8.3.2 CAN modules

Communication modules 616
Extension modules 621

The available communication CAN modules are:

I-LB+ - communication local bridge
The available extension CAN modules are:
Inteli AIN8 - extension CAN module with 8 analog inputs
Inteli IO8/8 - extension CAN module with 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
this CAN module can be switched to Inteli IO 16/0 - extension CAN module with 16 binary inputs and 2
analog outputs
Maximal number of CAN modules is 2. Modules are configured via LiteEdit2015. There are 2 slots for CAN
modules.
Note: I-LB+ communication module is not configured via LiteEdit2015 into controller CAN module slot. Also
this module is not counted into maximal number of CAN modules.

Note: It is possible to configure all combinations of CAN modules (same modules in both slots or different
modules in both slots).

Communication modules
I-LB+ 616

I-LB+
I-LB+ is communication modules for communication with all devices connected to CAN2 bus. Speed for
direct/modem connection can be up to 57600 bps. I-LB+ can be connected with PC via USB, RS232 or RS485.

InteliLite Global Guide 616

 Image 9.29 I-LB+

Image 9.30 I-LB+ dimensions

Note: All dimensions are in mm.

InteliLite Global Guide 617

 Terminals

POWER Power supply

CAN CAN 1 line
USB USB line
RS232 RS485 line
J13 - J18 SW / HW control
BOOT Programming
RESET Programming / reset
P1 Terminating resistor
P2 Terminating resistor
P3 RS485 or RS232 
P8 USB enable/disable 
P13 Communication speed
P14 Communication speed
P15 Modem control (HW / SW)
P16 Protocol (Modbus/ComAp)
P17 CAN address
Connection
P18
(direct/modem)
P20 Bias - A
P21 Bias - B
RxC,TxC CAN data
RxD, TxD RSxxx data
Tx,Rx USB USB data
RUN Power
PWR Module state

CAN1 termination (P1)

I-LB+ has included CAN terminating resistor (120 ohm). Close jumper P1 to connect terminating resistor to
CAN bus, open jumper P1 to disconnect terminating resistor.
RS232 or RS485 termination (P2)
I-LB+ has included RS232/RS485 terminating resistor (120 ohm). Close jumper P2 to connect terminating
resistor to RS232/RS485 bus, open jumper P2 to disconnect terminating resistor.
Select RS mode (P3)
Jumper P3 selecting RS mode. When jumper P3 is connected to 1-2(from left side), RS485 mode is activated.
When jumper P3 is connected to 2-3, RS232 mode is actives.
ComAp / Modbus (P16)
Jumper P16 selects between ComAp PC tools and third party PC SW for monitoring with Modbus interface.
ComAp PC tools are selected when P16 is opened; Modbus is selected when P16 is closed.

InteliLite Global Guide 618

 Modbus rate (P13 and P14)
Modbus rate is set by jumpers P13 and P14; description is in the table bellow.

Modbus rate P13 P14

9600 bps Open Open
19200 bps Close Open
38400 bps Open Close
57600 bps Close Close

Direct / Modem (P18)

Select between direct connection via RS232 or RS485 and modem connection type. For modem connection is
jumper P18 closed, for direct connection is jumper P18 opened.
ADR1 / ADR2 (P17)
Select device address. ADR1 is selected if P17 is opened and ADR2 is selected if P17 is closed.
SW / HW control (P15)
Select SW or HW modem control. Jumper P15 is opened for HW modem control and closed for SW modem
control.
RS485 bias resistor (P20 and P21)
Jumpers P20 and P21 are opened if the bias resistors (560R) are not requested. Closed jumper connects bias
resistor to the line A (P20) or B (P21).
USB interface enable/disable (P8)
Jumper P8 has to be set to enable USB interface. Opened jumper disables USB interface (disabled USB
doesn’t occupies a communication channel on the CAN bus i.e. there are still 3 free communications channels
on the CAN bus). USB interface allows only local communication (modbus is not implemented in this interface).

Default jumpers settings

Jumper Description State
P1 CAN terminating resistor Opened - not connect
P2 RS485 terminating resistor Opened - not connect
P3 RS232 or RS485 1 - 2 RS485 activated, 2 - 3 RS232 activated
P8 USB enable/disable Opened - disabled
P13 Modbus rate Opened
P14 Modbus rate Opened - 9600 bps
P15 HW or SW modem control Opened - HW control
P16 ComAp or Modbus Opened - ComAp protocol
P17 ADR1 or ADR2 Opened - ADR1
P18 Direct or Modem Opened - Direct

Programming firmware
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Disassemble the unit.
3. Put the BOOT jumper on a pin.

InteliLite Global Guide 619

 4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable : launch

5. Connect power supply of the module

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software
7. In FlashPrg program choose card 90F352 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn’t start – after 60 second the “Timeout” will be evaluated. In this
case please check:
Proper connection with the unit
COM port selection
Unit’s power supply is according manual
BOOT jumper is set on, try again from point 3
10. After successful programming, disconnect the power supply from the unit and remove the BOOT jumper
11. Assemble the unit again
12. Module FW is upgraded

LED indication

LED Description State State

RxC No data are received on the CAN line Dark
Data are received on the CAN line Blink
TxC No data are transmitted on the CAN line Dark
Data are transmitted on the CAN line Blink
RxD No data are received on the RS232 or RS485 line Dark
Data are received on the RS232 or RS485 line Blink
TxD No data are transmitted on the RS232 or RS485 line Dark
Data are transmitted on the RS232 or RS485 line Blink

InteliLite Global Guide 620

 LED Description State State
TxUSB No data are received on USB Dark
Data are received on USB Blink
RxUSB No data are transmitted on USB Dark
Data are transmitted on USB Blink
PWR No power supply Dark
Power supply OK Continuous light
RUN When at least one controller is active on the CAN bus Continuous light
After connection power supply - no controller detected on the CAN
Blink
bus (during communication speed detection).

Wiring
I-LB+ has to be connected to modem via standard modem cable (full RS232) where the DSR (Data Set Ready)
signal detects modem presence (when MODEM (HW) type selected). Three-wire RS232 cable (TxD, RxD,
GND) can be used (e.g. for GSM modems) when MODEM (SW) type is selected.

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 100 mA at 24 V
Interface to controller CAN2
Interface to modem or PC RS232, RS485, USB
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 95x96x43 mm (3,7”x3,8”x1,7”)

Extension modules
Inteli AIN8 621
Inteli IO8/8 626

Inteli AIN8
Inteli AIN8 module is extension module equipped with analog inputs. Inteli AIN8 module is connected to
controller by CAN1 bus.

InteliLite Global Guide 621

 Image 9.31 Inteli AIN8

Image 9.32 Inteli AIN8 dimensions

Note: All dimensions are in mm.

Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
resistor three wire input
current input
voltage input
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.

InteliLite Global Guide 622

 IMPORTANT: Impulse input is not supported in controller.

Supported sensors

Sensors
User curves NI100 [°F] (fix) 0-5V
PT100 [°C] (fix) NI1000 [°F] (fix) 0-10V
PT1000 [°C] (fix) 0-250ohm 4-20mA passive
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-2400ohm 4-20mA active
NI1000 [°C] (fix) 0-10k ohm 0-20mA passive
PT100 [°F] (fix) +-1V +-20mA active
PT1000 [°F] (fix) 0-2.4V

CAN address
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.
Note: In case of setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.

Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Separate the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on a pins
4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv

5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli AIN8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn’t start – after 60 second the “Timeout” will be evaluated. In this
case please check:

InteliLite Global Guide 623

 You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded

LED indication

LED status Description
Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn’t communicate with the controller).

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.
Terminator

Resistance sensor - 3 wires

Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0 – 250 Ω, 0 – 2400 Ω, 0 – 10 kΩ

InteliLite Global Guide 624

 Resistance sensor - 2 wires

Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0 – 250 Ω, 0 – 2400 Ω, 0 – 10 kΩ

Current sensor - active

Ranges: ±20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

Current sensor - passive

Ranges: 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

InteliLite Global Guide 625

 Voltage sensor

Ranges: ±1 V, 0 – 2,5 V, 0 – 5 V, 0 – 10 V

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110x110x46 mm (4,3”x4,3”x1,8”)
Weight 221,5 grams

Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-10 V
Voltage
Accuracy: ± 0,25 % of actual value + ± 25 mV
Range: ±20 mA
Current
Accuracy: ± 0,25 % of actual value + ± 50 µA
Range: 0- 10 kΩ
Resistive
Accuracy: resistance: ± 0,5 % of actual value + ± 2 Ω

Inteli IO8/8
Inteli IO8/8 module is an extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs and analog outputs.
Inteli IO8/8 is the name of the module, but it is possible to configure the module (by internal switch) to two
configurations:
Inteli IO8/8 - 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
Inteli IO 16/0 - 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs

InteliLite Global Guide 626

 Image 9.33 Inteli IO8/8

Image 9.34 Inteli IO8/8 dimensions

Note: All dimensions are in mm.

Inputs and outputs

Binary inputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
pull up
pull down
All 8 inputs are configured to one type together.
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.

InteliLite Global Guide 627

 Binary outputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
High side switch
Low side switch
Always all 8 inputs are configured to one type (HSS/LSS) together. All 8 outputs can be modified to inputs by
switch on the PCB ( Inteli IO8/8 to Inteli IO 16/0).
Analog outputs
2 channels
can be configured as:
voltage 0-10V
current 0-20mA
PWM (level 5V, with adjustable frequency from 200Hz to 2400Hz, with step 1Hz)
All inputs/outputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.

Output state check

Output state check function evaluates in real time the state of binary outputs and adjusted (required) state. In
case of failure (different state of required state and real state) history record and alarm are issued (type of the
alarm is set by “Protection upon module failure” - (No protection / Warning / Shutdown)).
This function is designed for short-circuit or other failure, which causes change of set state of binary output.

CAN address
In Inteli IO8/8 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, CAN address for binary
output and analog outputs is determined by DIP switch B.
In Inteli IO 16/0 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, first group of 8 input has
address A, second group of 8 inputs has address A+1. CAN address of analog outputs is set by DIP switch B.
Note: In case of setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.

Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Separate the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on a pins

InteliLite Global Guide 628

 4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv

5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli IO8/8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn’t start – after 60 second the “Timeout” will be evaluated. In this
case please check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded

LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary output is
set. When this LED is shining, then module is configured as 8 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs. When this
LED is dark, then the module is configured as 16 binary inputs.
LED at power connector - status LED

InteliLite Global Guide 629

 LED status Description
Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli IO8/8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn’t communicate with the controller).

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of inputs and outputs.
Binary inputs - pull up

There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see case when binary input is connected between
BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the GND (-) - dashed line).
On lower picture is case of wiring between BIN2 and GND (-). Both ways are correct.
Binary inputs - pull down

There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see case when binary input is connected between
BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the Ucc (+) - dashed line).
On lower picture is case of wiring between BIN2 and Ucc (+). Both ways are correct.

InteliLite Global Guide 630

 Binary outputs - high side

When high side setting of outputs is chosen - binary output must be connected to the minus potential directly
Terminal VHS (voltage High side) has to be connected to positive potential directly. Maximal current of each
binary output is 500 mA. Size of fuse depends on load.
Binary outputs - low side

When low side setting of outputs is chosen - binary output must be connected to the plus potential of power
supply directly. Minus potential is connected internally - dashed line.
Analog outputs

Limit of analog ground (AGND) is 100mA.

IMPORTANT: Terminator for analog output has special analog ground (AGND), which must not be
connected to the GND.

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C

InteliLite Global Guide 631

 Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110x110x46 mm (4,3”x4,3”x1,8”)
Weight 240 grams

Analog outputs
Number of channels 2
Range 0-10 V
Voltage Accuracy: ± 20 mV + ±0,5 % of actual value
Imax 5 mA
Range: 0-20 mA
Current Accuracy: ± 100 µA + ±0,5 % of actual value
Rmax 500 Ω
Level 5 V
PWM Frequency - adjustable 200÷2400 Hz
Imax 20 mA

Binary inputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 16 for Inteli IO 16/0
Input resistance 4400 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for close contact indication 6 to 36 V DC

Binary outputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 0 for Inteli IO 16/0
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC

InteliLite Global Guide 632